US20070060282A1 - Gaming machine, game control method and game system - Google Patents
Gaming machine, game control method and game system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20070060282A1 US20070060282A1 US11/262,804 US26280405A US2007060282A1 US 20070060282 A1 US20070060282 A1 US 20070060282A1 US 26280405 A US26280405 A US 26280405A US 2007060282 A1 US2007060282 A1 US 2007060282A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- game state
- game
- player
- gaming machine
- games
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims description 38
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 claims description 336
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 claims description 61
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 claims description 48
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 claims description 8
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 claims description 8
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 abstract description 2
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 30
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 22
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 19
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 12
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 8
- UTMWFJSRHLYRPY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,3',5,5'-tetrachlorobiphenyl Chemical compound ClC1=CC(Cl)=CC(C=2C=C(Cl)C=C(Cl)C=2)=C1 UTMWFJSRHLYRPY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 241000167854 Bourreria succulenta Species 0.000 description 3
- 210000001015 abdomen Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000005284 excitation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000000284 extract Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 description 3
- XLDBTRJKXLKYTC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,3,4,4'-tetrachlorobiphenyl Chemical compound C1=CC(Cl)=CC=C1C1=CC=C(Cl)C(Cl)=C1Cl XLDBTRJKXLKYTC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IICCLYANAQEHCI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4,5,6,7-tetrachloro-3',6'-dihydroxy-2',4',5',7'-tetraiodospiro[2-benzofuran-3,9'-xanthene]-1-one Chemical compound O1C(=O)C(C(=C(Cl)C(Cl)=C2Cl)Cl)=C2C21C1=CC(I)=C(O)C(I)=C1OC1=C(I)C(O)=C(I)C=C21 IICCLYANAQEHCI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000220223 Fragaria Species 0.000 description 2
- 235000016623 Fragaria vesca Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 235000011363 Fragaria x ananassa Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 208000001613 Gambling Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012797 qualification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003745 diagnosis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000012054 meals Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000008054 signal transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
- G07F—COIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
- G07F17/00—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services
- G07F17/32—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services for games, toys, sports, or amusements
- G07F17/326—Game play aspects of gaming systems
- G07F17/3267—Game outcomes which determine the course of the subsequent game, e.g. double or quits, free games, higher payouts, different new games
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
- G07F—COIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
- G07F17/00—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services
- G07F17/32—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services for games, toys, sports, or amusements
- G07F17/3244—Payment aspects of a gaming system, e.g. payment schemes, setting payout ratio, bonus or consolation prizes
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine in which a game is conducted using a game media (game valuable) such as a coin and the like, a game control method for the gaming machine, and a game system comprising the gaming machine and a control device.
- a gaming machine such as a slot machine in which a game is conducted using a game media (game valuable) such as a coin and the like
- a game control method for the gaming machine such as a coin and the like
- a game system comprising the gaming machine and a control device.
- a game is played by inserting various kinds of game media such as a coin, cash and the like into a gaming machine.
- game media such as a coin, cash and the like
- Each gaming machine pays out a dividend to a player according to a prize wining state (a result of playing the game) generated while the game is in progress.
- a credit spent in each slot machine is partly reserved and in a case where the reservation reaches a predetermined amount, one of the slot machines provides a so-called “jackpot” paying out a big amount, which is not paid out in an ordinary hit (JP-A 2003-117053).
- a hit in each machine usually occurs on a preset probability and a player advances a game with expectation of the hit to be encountered.
- One of the slot machines has a chance to hit a jackpot at a timing in a lottery different from a common lottery in which a hit based on the above-mentioned probability is set in the slot machines.
- plural casinos are interconnected in a network in order to increase a payout amount in a jackpot.
- a system has been available in which a host computer and plural gaming machines are interconnected on a network and the generating of a bonus in the gaming machines is controlled by the host computer (U.S. Pat. No. 5,820,459).
- the host computer gives a bonus qualification to a gaming machine in which the number of inserted coins reaches a predetermined number.
- the host computer transmits a command to one gaming machine selected from gaming machines having bonus qualification, when a value of the bonus pool reaches a predetermined threshold value.
- the gaming machine which received the command is enabled to play a bonus game high in gambling characteristic.
- a chance to acquire the profit of a bonus game is one of gaming machines in which a total number of inserted coins reaches a predetermined number.
- a chance to acquire the profit of a bonus game is not always given to a player having spent many coins. Therefore, in the system described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,820,459, there has arisen a case where a player having spent many coins cannot secure the profit of a bonus game and another player who has just started the game acquires a bonus game profit, in a similar way to that in a slot machine described in JP-A 2003-117053.
- the present invention has been made in light of the above-mentioned problems and it is an object of the present invention to provide: a gaming machine capable of preventing a player who has spent many of the game media such as coins from feeling unpleasant against a game, building up a distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game; a game control method related to the gaming machine; and a gaming machine system equipped with the gaming machine and a control device.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery
- the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery
- the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to the player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery
- the number of games is accumulatively counted and it is determined whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established. And, when it is determined that said condition is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- the payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively counted until the second special game state is generated is “ ⁇ 10000”
- 5000 pieces of game media corresponding to 50% of the payment balance in terms of the game media are paid out.
- a profit according to the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player can be returned in the second special game state.
- it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- reception means that can accept for one game an insertion of game media up to a predetermined upper limit value is provided, and the means for generating the second special game state generates the second special game state in a case when the number of inserted game media for the game played by the player is equal to the upper limit when a condition that the number of games reaches the set value is established.
- a player can be urged to insert the game media up to the upper limit, thereby enabling a facility such as a casino to increase its profit.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery
- symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery
- the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line would is a special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated only when the above condition is established. Because an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery
- symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery
- a first special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination
- the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- a gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery
- symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery
- a first special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination
- the number of games is accumulatively counted and whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established is determined. And when it is determined that said condition is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated.
- the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device,
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in a case where said condition is established when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively every time a game is played reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established.
- the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine equipped with a processing device and a storage device, and connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing transmitting an identification information of a gaming machine stored in the storage device to the control device through the communication line each time a game is played;
- a processing receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established based on the command signal, and executing the program.
- the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to the player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device,
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is determined to have been established, and executing the program.
- the number of games is accumulatively counted and it is determined whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established. And, when it is determined that said condition is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a profit according to the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player can be returned in the second special game state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a player can be urged to insert the game media up to the upper limit, thereby enabling a facility such as a casino to increase its profit.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device, and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols,
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of the winning lines is relatively increased when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively every time a game is played reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established.
- the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- a gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols, and connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing transmitting an identification information of the gaming machine stored in the storage device to a control device through the communication line every time a game is played;
- a processing receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased based on the command signal, and executing the program.
- the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device, and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols,
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing counting accumulatively the number of games each time a game is played
- the number of games is accumulatively counted and whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established is determined. And when it is determined that said condition is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery
- a second special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when a condition that a payment balance in terms of the game media which is accumulatively counted every time a game is played becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established.
- the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery
- a program for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established based on the command signal.
- the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to the player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery
- a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established in a case where said condition is determined to have been established.
- the payment balance in terms of the game media is accumulatively counted and it is determined whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the-set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media has been established. And, when it is determined that said condition is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- the configuration (20) for example, when the number of games accumulatively counted until the second special game state is generated is “600”, 6000 pieces of game media corresponding to ten times the number of the game media are paid out. Thus, a profit according to the number of games played by the player can be returned in the second special game state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- the gaming machine comprising reception means that can accept for one game an insertion of game media up to a predetermined upper limit value, wherein the means for generating the second special game state generates the second special game state in a case when the number of inserted game media for the game played by the player is equal to the upper limit when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media is equal to or below the set value is established.
- a player can be urged to insert the game media up to the upper limit, thereby enabling a facility such as a casino to increase its profit.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery
- symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery
- the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery
- symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery
- the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated.
- the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery
- symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery
- the payment balance in terms of the game media is accumulatively counted, and whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media has been established is determined. And when it is determined that said condition has been established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated.
- the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device,
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in a case where a condition given below is established, when said condition that a payment balance in terms of the game media which is accumulatively counted every time a game is played becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established, and executing the program.
- the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine equipped with a processing device and a storage device, and connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing transmitting the payment balance in terms of the game media of the game played by the player stored in the storage device together with the identification information of a gaming machine to the control device through the communication line every time a game is played;
- a processing receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game which is counted accumulatively by the control device based on an identification information of the gaming machine and the payment balance in terms of the game media in a game played by a player becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established, and executing the program.
- the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to the player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing counting accumulatively the payment balance in terms of the game media each time a game is played;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in a case where said condition is established, when said condition is determined to have been established, and executing the program.
- the payment balance in terms of the game media is accumulatively counted and it is determined whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media has been established. And, when it is determined that said condition has been established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a profit according to the number of games played by the player can be returned in the second special game state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a player can be urged to insert the game media up to the upper limit, thereby enabling a facility such as a casino to increase its profit.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device, and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols,
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased when a condition that the a payment balance in terms of the game media counted accumulatively every time a game is played becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established, and executing the program.
- the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols, and connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing transmitting an identification information of a gaming machine stored in the storage device together with the identification information to the control device through the communication line every time a game is played;
- a processing receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media which is counted accumulatively by the control device based on an identification information of the gaming machine and the payment balance in terms of the game media in a game played by a player becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased based on the command signal, and executing the program.
- the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated.
- the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device, and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols,
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing counting accumulatively the payment balance in terms of the game media each time a game is played;
- the payment balance in terms of the game media is accumulatively counted, and whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media has been established is determined. And when it is determined that said condition is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated.
- the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine comprising:
- the profit given to the player only when the above condition is satisfied is given.
- it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine comprising:
- the player when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of the winning lines is increased.
- the player can play the game in the advantageous state until the number of games satisfies a predetermined condition.
- it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine comprising:
- the profit given to the player only when the above condition is satisfied is given.
- it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a gaming machine comprising:
- the configuration (36) when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of winning lines is increased. Thus, the player can play the game in the advantageous state until the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a game control method comprising:
- the profit given only in a case where above condition is satisfied to the player is given.
- it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a game control method comprising:
- the player when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of winning lines is increased.
- the player can play the game in the advantageous state until the number of games satisfies the predetermined condition.
- it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a game control method comprising:
- the profit given only in a case where above condition is satisfied to the player is given.
- it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- a game control method comprising:
- the configuration (40) when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of winning lines is increased. Thus, the player can play the game in the advantageous state until the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- control device includes:
- the gaming machine includes:
- the profit given to the player only when the above condition is satisfied is given.
- it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- the gaming machine includes:
- the configuration (42) when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of winning lines is increased.
- the player can play the game in the advantageous state until the number of games satisfies the predetermined condition.
- it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- control device includes:
- the gaming machine includes:
- the profit given to the player only when the above condition is satisfied is given.
- it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention provides the following configuration.
- control device includes:
- the gaming machine includes:
- the configuration (44) when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of winning lines is increased. Thus, the player can play the game in the advantageous state until the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the present invention it can be prevented that the player who used many coins feels frustrated, raises distrust, or loses interest in the game.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the entire construction of a game system according to the first embodiment
- FIG. 2 is a perspective view schematically showing a gaming machine according to the first embodiment
- FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing the symbol sequence depicted on the outer circumferential surface of each reel
- FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal construction of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 ;
- FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the internal construction of a control device according to the first embodiment
- FIG. 6 is a figure schematically showing an example of correspondence table between a gaming machine identification number and a game history
- FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a procedure in an authentication reading processing for a game program and a game system program executed by a mother board and a gaming board shown in FIG. 4 ;
- FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a game mode selection processing
- FIGS. 9A and 9B are figures showing an image displayed on the lower image display panel when a game mode selection processing is executed
- FIG. 10 a flowchart showing a subroutine of a game execution processing
- FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a lottery processing
- FIG. 12 is a figure schematically showing a relation between a plural winning combination, establishment possibility of the winning combination and the number of payout in the first embodiment
- FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a reel rotating control processing
- FIGS. 14A to 14 D are side views for describing a rotating operation of the reel
- FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence table between the number of steps and the code No.
- FIG. 16 is flowchart showing a subroutine of a bonus game processing
- FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a return mode processing
- FIG. 18 is a figure showing an example of image displayed on the lower image display panel when a game state shifts to the return mode (when the second special game state is generated);
- FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a counting processing
- FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a return mode processing in a second embodiment
- FIG. 21 is a figure schematically showing a relation between a plural winning combination, establishment possibility of the winning combination and the number of payout in the return mode according to the second embodiment.
- FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing another example of a subroutine of a game execution processing.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the entire construction of a game system according to the first embodiment.
- a game system 100 includes: plural gaming machines 10 ; and a control device 200 connected to the gaming machines 10 through a predetermined communication line 101 .
- a game system 100 may be constructed in one recreation facility capable of playing various kinds of games such as a bar, a casino and the like, or between plural recreation facilities.
- the game system 100 may be constructed on each floor or section of the recreation facility.
- the communication line 101 is not particularly limited, and may be wired or wireless, and either a dedicated line or a switched line can be used.
- the gaming machine 10 is a slot machine.
- a gaming machine is not limited to a slot machine, and for example, a so-called single gaming machine such as a video slot machine, a video card gaming machine and the like may be adopted, and a so-called mass game (multi-terminal gaming machine) such as a racing game, a bingo game, a public lottery and the like, which is a game that takes a predetermined time for a result to be displayed, may also be adopted.
- a so-called single gaming machine such as a video slot machine, a video card gaming machine and the like
- mass game multi-terminal gaming machine
- a coin, a note or an electronic valuable information corresponding thereto is used as a game media.
- the game media is not particularly limited, and for example, a medal, a token, an electronic money and a ticket can be used.
- the ticket is not particularly limited and may include, for example, a ticket with a bar code as described later, and of the like tickets.
- the control device 200 controls plural gaming machines 10 . Especially, in the first embodiment, the control device 200 controls a transition to a return mode in each of the gaming machines 10 .
- the return mode corresponds to the second special game state in the present invention and many coins are paid out in the return mode.
- the control device 200 may be a device which controls the return rate by controlling the transition to the return mode. In such a construction, the control device 200 may be a device which controls the return rates of each of the gaming machines 10 individually, or a device which controls the return rate across all gaming machines 10 collectively.
- the control device 200 may further function as a so-called hole server which is installed in a recreation facility having plural gaming machines 10 , or as a server which collectively controls plural recreation facilities. Moreover, every gaming machine 10 has its own identification number, and the source of data transmitted to the control device 200 from each of the gaming machines 10 is distinguished therein by their identification numbers. The identification number is also used to designate a transmission destination of data transmitted to the gaming machine 10 from the control device 200 .
- the identification number of a gaming machine corresponds to the identification information on a gaming machine of the present invention.
- the identification information on a gaming machine of the present invention is not particularly limited, and examples thereof may include: a letter, a symbol, a figure, a combination thereof, and the like.
- FIG. 2 is a perspective view schematically showing a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
- the gaming machine 10 includes: a cabinet 11 ; a top box 12 placed on the upper side of the cabinet 11 ; and a main door 13 provided at the front face of the cabinet 11 .
- three reels 14 14 L, 14 C and 14 R
- Twenty two designs (hereinafter, also referred to as symbols) are depicted as symbol sequences on the outer circumferential surface of each of the reels 14 .
- Reels 14 ( 14 L, 14 C and 14 R) constitute symbol display device and symbol display means in the present invention.
- a lower image display panel 16 is provided over the reels 14 in the main door 13 .
- the lower image display panel 16 is provided with a transparent liquid crystal panel, and various kinds of information, representation image and the like associated with the game are displayed while the game is played.
- the lower image display panel 16 is an output device for an image and functions also as output means capable of outputting an image.
- a number-of-credits display section 31 and a number-of-payouts display section 32 are formed on the lower image display panel 16 .
- the number of credited coins is displayed as an image on the number-of-credits display section 31 .
- the number of coins to be paid out is shown as an image on the number-of-payouts display section 32 , when a combination of symbols stop displayed on a winning line L is a predetermined combination.
- Three display windows 15 ( 15 L, 15 C and 15 R), the back faces of which are visually recognizable, are formed on the lower image display panel 16 , and through each of the display windows 15 , three of the symbols depicted on the outer circumferential surface of each of the reels 14 are displayed.
- One winning line L traversing horizontally the three display windows 15 is formed on the lower image display panel 16 .
- the winning line L defines a combination of symbols.
- Display windows 15 and lower image display panel ( 16 L, 16 C and 16 R) constitute symbol display device and symbol display means in the present invention.
- the winning lines L which traverse horizontally or obliquely the three display windows 15 are formed; the winning lines L, the number thereof which becomes effective set to be dependent on the number of coin-in, become effective; and a combination of symbols stop displayed on the winning line L which became effective is a predetermined combination, the number of coins corresponding to the stop-displayed combination may be paid out.
- a touch panel 69 which is not shown in the figure, is provided on the front face of the lower image display panel 16 and the player can input various kinds of commands by operating the touch panel 69 .
- a control panel 20 constituting of plural buttons 23 to 27 which are inputted by the player, commands associated with progress of the game; a coin receiving slot 21 accepting coins into the cabinet 11 ; and a note identifier 22 .
- the control panel 20 is provided with: a spin button 23 ; a change button 24 ; a CASHOUT button 25 ; a 1-BET button 26 ; and a maximum BET button 27 .
- the spin button 23 is used for inputting a command to start the rotating of the reels 14 .
- the change button 24 is used in a case where a player requests an attendant of a recreation facility to exchange money.
- the CASHOUT button 25 is used for inputting a command to pay out credited coins to a coin tray 18 .
- the 1-BET button 26 is used for inputting a command to bet one coin of the credited coins.
- the maximum BET button 27 is used for inputting a command to bet the maximum number of coins that can be bet on one game (50 coins in the first embodiment) of the credited coins.
- insertion of a game media means that a game media is bet on a game.
- a game media is bet on a game.
- insertion of coins into the coin receiving slot 21 corresponds to insertion of a game media.
- the bet of the credited coins on the game corresponds to insertion of a game media.
- the note identifier 22 is used not only for discriminating a false note from a true note but also for accepting the true note into the cabinet 11 .
- the note identifier 22 may be configured such that a ticket 39 with a bar code which will be described later can be read.
- a belly glass 34 on which characters and the like of the gaming machine 10 are depicted is provided on the front face of the lower portion of the main door 13 , that is, below the control panel 20 .
- An upper image display panel 33 is provided at the front face of a top box 12 .
- the upper image display panel 33 is provided with a liquid crystal panel and, for example, an image to introduce the contents of the game or explain a game rule is displayed thereto.
- the lower image display panel 16 is an image output device and functions also as the output means of an image in the present embodiment, in the present invention, the upper image display panel 33 may also be an image output device, which functions also as the output means of an image.
- a speaker 29 is provided in the top box 12 .
- the speaker 29 is a sound output device and functions as output means capable of outputting a sound.
- a ticket printer 35 , a card reader 36 , a data display 37 and a key pad 38 are provided beneath the upper image display panel 33 .
- the ticket printer 35 prints on a ticket a bar code in which data such as the number of credits, date, time, identification number of the gaming machine 10 and of the like data are encoded, and outputs the ticket 39 with a bar code.
- a player can make the ticket 39 with a bar code to be read by a second gaming machine and play a game in the second gaming machine, or exchange in a predetermined place (for example, at a cashier in the casino) of a recreation facility the ticket 39 with a bar code to notes.
- the card reader 36 is used for reading data from a smart card and writing data onto a smart card.
- the smart card is a card to be carried by a player, and for example, data to identify a player and data concerning a history of a game played by a player are stored thereon. Data corresponding to a coin, a note or a credit may also be stored on the smart card.
- a magnetic stripe card may be adopted.
- the data display 37 is a fluorescent display and the like, and it is used, for example, to display data read by the card reader 36 and data inputted by a player from the key pad 38 .
- the key pad 38 is used for inputting a command or data to issue a ticket and the like.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing the symbol sequence depicted on the outer circumferential surface of each reel.
- Twenty two symbols each are depicted on the outer circumferential surface of the left reel 14 L, the middle reel 14 C and the right reel 14 R.
- a sequence of the symbols depicted on the outer circumferential surface of each of the reels 14 is different from one another.
- the sequences of the symbols are combinations of the following symbols: “JACKPOT 7”, “BLUE 7”, “BELL”, “CHERRY”, “STRAWBERRY”, “PLUM”, “ORANGE” and “APPLE”.
- the symbol sequence “APPLE” is a bonus game trigger (a symbol to transit to a bonus game).
- a bonus game corresponds to the first special game state.
- a bonus game is a free game (a game in which a predetermined number thereof can be played without inserting coins for BET).
- the first special game state is not particularly limited as far as it is a game state advantageous to the player.
- a game state that is advantageous to the player is not particularly limited as far as it is more advantageous than an ordinary game state (a game state other than the first special game state or the second special game state) and examples thereof include: a state where more of the game media can be earned than in an ordinary game state, a state where the game media can be earned on a probability higher than in an ordinary game state, a state where the number of the game media spent by a player is less than in an ordinary game state and of the like state.
- examples of the first special game state include a free game, a second game, a mystery bonus and the like.
- the sequence of symbols depicted on each of the reels 14 are, when the spin button 23 is pressed after the 1-BET button or the maximum BET button 27 is pressed to start a game, scroll displayed by scrolling downwards in the display windows 15 during the rotating of the reels 14 , and after a predetermined time elapses, the rotating of the reels 14 comes to a stop, and thus the sequence of symbols are stop displayed in the display windows 15 .
- Various kinds of winning combinations are predetermined based on combinations of symbols and when a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination stops on the winning line L, the number of payout coins corresponding to the winning combination is added to credits owned by the player.
- a bonus game trigger has been established, a bonus game is generated.
- a game state shifts to a return mode after the symbols are stop displayed as described above.
- the game state shifts to the return mode after the bonus game is over.
- the return mode corresponds to the second special game state.
- the number of winning lines is increased and five winning lines are adopted. Therefore, in the return mode, a possibility of winning the bonus game trigger or the other winning combination becomes high.
- FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal construction of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 .
- a gaming board 50 includes: CPU (Central Processing Unit) 51 , ROM 55 and boot ROM 52 which are interconnected to one another by an internal bus; a card slot 53 S which accepts a memory card 53 ; an IC socket 54 S which accepts GAL (Generic Array Logic) 54 .
- CPU Central Processing Unit
- ROM 55 and boot ROM 52 which are interconnected to one another by an internal bus
- card slot 53 S which accepts a memory card 53
- an IC socket 54 S which accepts GAL (Generic Array Logic) 54 .
- GAL Generic Array Logic
- the memory card 53 is constituted of non-volatile memories such as CompactFlash (registered trademark) and stores a game program and a game system program.
- the game program contains a lottery program.
- the lottery program is a program for determining symbols (code Nos. corresponding to the symbols) on each of the reels 14 which are to be stop displayed on the winning line L.
- the lottery program contains one or more of symbol weighting determination data, each corresponding to respective plural kinds of payout rates (for example, 80%, 84% and 88%).
- the symbol weighting determination data is data showing a correspondence relationship between a code No. (see FIG. 3 ) of each symbol and one or plural random number values from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 255), for each of the three reels 14 .
- a payout rate is determined based on data for setting a payout rate outputted from the GAL 54 , and the lottery is executed based on symbol weighting determination data corresponding to the payout rate.
- the lottery is executed based on the same symbol weighting determination data during the transition to the return mode.
- the present invention is not limited to this example and when a game state shifts to the return mode, the lottery may be executed based on different symbol weighting determination data.
- the card slot 53 S is configured so that the memory card 53 can be inserted therein or drawn out therefrom, and connected to a mother board 40 through IDE bus. Therefore, a kind or contents of a game played in the gaming machine 10 can be changed by drawing out the memory card 53 from the card slot 53 S, writing a different game program and game system program thereon, and inserting the memory card 53 into the card slot 53 S thereafter. Moreover, a kind or contents of a game played in the gaming machine 10 can also be changed by changing a memory card 53 on which a game program and a game system program are stored to a different memory card 53 on which a different game program and game system program are stored.
- the game program includes a program related to progress in a game; a program for generating the first special game state; and a program for generating the second special game state.
- the game program further includes: image data and sound data outputted while a game is played and image data and sound data used as notification data.
- GAL 54 is one kind of PLD having an OR fixed array structure.
- GAL 54 is equipped with a plurality of an input port and an output port and when a predetermined data is inputted to the input port, data corresponding to the input data is outputted from the output port.
- the data outputted from the output port is the above-mentioned data for setting a payout rate.
- the IC socket 54 S is configured such that GAL 54 can be mounted thereto or demounted therefrom, and connected to the mother board 40 through PCI bus. Therefore, data for setting a payout rate outputted from GAL 54 can be changed by drawing out GAL 54 from the IC socket 54 S, rewriting a program stored on GAL 54 , mounting GAL 54 is to the IC socket 54 S thereafter. Moreover, data for setting a payout rate can also be changed by changing GAL 54 to a different GAL 54 .
- CPU 51 , ROM 55 and boot ROM 52 interconnected to each other by the internal bus are connected to the mother board 40 by PCI bus.
- the PCI bus not only conducts signal transmission between the mother board 40 and the gaming board 50 , but also supplies electric power to the gaming board 50 from the mother board 40 .
- ROM 55 stores country identification information and an authentication program therein.
- Boot ROM 52 stores a preliminary authentication program, a program for CPU 51 to activate the preliminary authentication program (a boot code) and the like therein.
- the authentication program is a program to authenticate a game program and a game system program (an alteration check program).
- the authentication program is stated along a procedure for confirmation and certification that the game program and the game system program that are objects of an authentication capture processing are not altered, that is, a procedure for conducting authentication of the game program and the game system program (an authentication procedure).
- the preliminary authentication program is a program for authenticating the above-mentioned authentication program.
- the preliminary authentication program is stated along a procedure for certification that an authentication program that is an object of an authentication processing is not altered, that is, a procedure for authenticating the authentication program (an authentication procedure).
- the mother board 40 is constructed with a general-purpose mother board commercially available (a printed circuit board on which basic parts of a personal computer are mounted) and includes: a main CPU 41 ; ROM (Read Only Memory) 42 ; RAM (Random Access Memory) 43 and a communication interface 44 .
- the main CPU 41 is the processing device of the present invention.
- ROM 42 is constituted of a memory device such as a flash memory and stores thereon a program such as BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) executed by the main CPU 41 and permanent data.
- BIOS Basic Input/Output System
- BIOS Basic Input/Output System
- BIOS Basic Input/Output System
- main CPU 41 not only is an initialization processing for predetermined peripheral devices conducted, but a capture processing for the game program and the game system program stored on the memory card 53 is also started via the gaming board 50 .
- contents of ROM 42 may be rewritable or not rewritable.
- RAM 43 stores data and a program used at the time of operation of the main CPU 41 .
- RAM 43 can store the authentication program read through the gaming board 50 together with the game program and the game system program.
- RAM 43 is the storage device of the present invention.
- RAM 43 is provided with a storage region for a return mode flag.
- the return mode flag is a flag to be referred to when a game state is to be selected whether it should be shifted to a return mode corresponding to the second special game state or not.
- the storage region of the return mode flag is constituted of a storage region with, for example, a predetermined number of bits and the return mode flag is turned “ON” or “OFF” according to storage contents in the storage region. If the return mode flag is set to the state “ON”, the game state thereafter shifts to the return mode without fail.
- RAM 43 further stores data on the number of credits, the number of coin-in or coin-out for one game, and the like.
- the communication interface 44 is used to communicate with the control device 200 through the communication line 101 .
- the main CPU 41 transmits the number of coin-in and the number of coin-out together with the gaming machine identification number of the gaming machine 10 to the control device 200 each time a game is played.
- the number of games, an accumulative number of coin-in and an accumulative number of coin-out is made to be associated with each gaming machine identification number, and stored in the control device 200 .
- a return command signal is transmitted from the control device 200 .
- the main CPU 41 receives the return command signal through the communication interface 44 , the return mode flag is set to the state “ON”.
- Both a body PCB (Printed Circuit Board) 60 and a door PCB 80 which will be described later are connected to the mother board 40 by USB.
- a power supply unit 45 is also connected to the mother board 40 .
- CPU 41 of the mother board 40 activated, but CPU 51 is also activated from electric power supplied through the PCI bus to the gaming board 50 .
- Equipment and devices which generate input signals to be inputted to the main CPU 41 , and equipment and devices of which operations are controlled by a control signal outputted from the main CPU 41 are connected to the body PCB 60 and the door PCB 80 .
- the main CPU 41 executes a game program and a game system program stored in RAM 43 based of an input signal inputted to the main CPU 41 , and thereby performs a predetermined computational processing, stores results of thereof into RAM 43 and transmits a control signal to each equipment and device as a control processing for each of the equipment and devices.
- a lamp 30 , a sub CPU 61 , a hopper 66 , a coin detecting section 67 , a graphic board 68 , a speaker 29 as an output device, a touch panel 69 , a note identifier 22 , a ticket printer 35 , a card reader 36 , a key switch 38 S and a data display 37 are connected to the body PCB 60 .
- the lamp 30 is lit up in a predetermined pattern based on a control signal outputted from the main CPU 41 .
- the sub CPU 61 controls the rotation and stopping of the reels 14 ( 14 L, 14 C and 14 R).
- a motor driving circuit 62 equipped with FPGA (Field Programmable Gate array) 63 and a driver 64 is connected to the sub CPU 61 .
- FPGA 63 is an electronic circuit such as LSI capable of programming and works as a control circuit of a stepping motor 70 .
- the driver 64 works as an amplifier circuit of a pulse to be inputted to the stepping motor 70 .
- the stepping motors 70 ( 70 L, 70 C and 70 R) which rotate each of the reels 14 , are connected to the motor driving circuit 62 .
- the stepping motor 70 is a 1-2 phase excitation type stepping motor.
- the sub CPU 61 , the motor driving circuit 62 and the stepping motor 70 constitute symbol display device and symbol display means.
- an exciting type of the stepping motor is not particularly limited, and for example, a motor of a 2 or 1 phase excitation type can be adopted.
- a DC motor may be adopted instead of a stepping motor.
- a deviation counter, a D/A converter and a servo amplifier are sequentially connected to the sub CPU 61 in this order and the DC motor is connected to the servo amplifier.
- a rotational position of the DC motor is detected by a rotary encoder and a current rotational position of the DC motor is supplied as data from the rotary encoder to the deviation counter.
- An index detecting circuit 65 and a position change detecting circuit 71 are connected to the sub CPU 61 .
- the index detecting circuit 65 is used for detecting positions (indexes described later) of the rotating reels 14 and can also detect an out-of-order state of the reels 14 .
- positions indexes described later
- out-of-order state of the reels 14 As for the control of the rotating and stopping of the reels 14 , detailed description will be given later by making reference to the figures.
- the position change detecting circuit 71 detects a change of stoppage positions of the reels 14 after the stopping of the rotating of the reels 14 .
- the position change detecting circuit 71 detects the change of stoppage positions of the reels 14 , for example, in a case where the stoppage position is changed by force by a player as if the combination of symbols was in a wining state, despite the fact that the combination of symbols is not actually in a wining state, and of the like cases.
- the position change detecting circuit 71 is configured to be capable of detecting the change of stoppage position of the reel 14 by, for example, detecting fins (not shown in the figure) attached with a predetermined space on the inner side of the reel 14 .
- An index detecting circuit 65 and a position change detecting circuit 71 constitute symbol display device and symbol display means.
- the hopper 66 is installed in the cabinet 11 and pays out a predetermined number of coins from a coin payout exit 19 to a coin tray 18 based on a control signal outputted from the main CPU 41 .
- a coin detecting section 67 is installed inside the coin payout exit 19 and when detecting that a predetermined number of coins has been paid out from the coin payout exit 19 , outputs an input signal to the main CPU 41 .
- the graphic board 68 controls, based on a control signal outputted from the main CPU 41 , image displays on the upper image display panel 33 and the lower image display panel 16 .
- the number of credits stored in RAM 43 is displayed on the number-of-credits display section 31 of the lower image display panel 16 .
- the number of coin-out is displayed on the number-of-payouts display section 31 of the lower image display panel 16 .
- winning line L is displayed on lower image display panel 16 .
- the graphic board 68 is equipped with VDP (Video Display Processor) which generates image data based on a control signal outputted from the main CPU 41 and a video RAM which temporarily stores image data generated by VDP, and of the like equipments. Note that image data used in generating image data with VDP is read from the memory card 53 and contained in a game program stored in RAM 43 .
- VDP Video Display Processor
- the note identifier 22 not only discriminates a true note from a false note, but also accepts the true note into the cabinet 11 .
- the note identifier 22 when accepting a true note, outputs an input signal to the main CPU 41 based on a face amount of the note.
- the main CPU 41 stores the number of credits corresponding to the amount of the note transmitted with the input signal.
- the ticket printer 35 based on a control signal outputted from the main CPU 41 , prints on a ticket a bar code obtained by encoding data such as the number of credits, date and time, the identification number of the gaming machine 10 , and of the like data stored in RAM 43 , and outputs the ticket 39 with a bar code.
- the card reader 36 transmits to the main CPU 41 data read from the smart card and writes data onto the smart card based on a control signal from the main CPU 41 .
- the key switch 38 S is provided on the keypad 38 , and when the keypad 38 is operated by a player, outputs a predetermined input signal to the main CPU 41 .
- the data display 37 displays, based on a control signal outputted from the main CPU 41 , data read by the card reader 36 and data inputted by a player through the key pad 38 .
- the control panel 20 , a reverter 21 S, a coin counter 21 C and a cold cathode tube 81 are connected to the door PCB 80 .
- the control panel 20 is provided with a spin switch 23 s corresponding to the spin button 23 , a change switch 24 S corresponding to the change button 24 , a CASHOUT switch 25 S corresponding to the CASHOUT button 25 , a 1-BET switch 26 S corresponding to the 1-BET button 26 , and a maximum BET switch 27 S corresponding to the maximum BET button 27 .
- each of the switches 23 S to 27 S corresponding thereto outputs input signals to the main CPU 41 .
- the coin counter 21 C is installed inside the coin receiving slot 21 , and discriminates whether a coin inserted by a player into the coin receiving slot 21 is true or false. Coins other than the true ones are discharged from the coin payout exit 19 .
- the coin counter 21 C also outputs an input signal to the main CPU 41 when a true coin is detected.
- the reverter 21 S operates based on a control signal outputted from the main CPU 41 and distributes coins recognized by the coin counter 21 C as true coins into a cash box (not shown in the figure) or the hopper 66 , which are disposed in the gaming machine 10 .
- a cash box not shown in the figure
- the hopper 66 which are disposed in the gaming machine 10 .
- true coins are distributed into the cash box.
- true coins are distributed into the hopper 66 .
- the cold cathode tube 81 works as a backlight installed on the back face sides of the lower image display panel 16 and the upper image display panel 33 and is lit up based on a control signal outputted from the main CPU 41 .
- FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the internal construction of a control device according to first embodiment of the present invention.
- a control device 200 includes: CPU 201 as a processing device; ROM 202 ; RAM 203 as a temporary storage device; a communication interface 204 ; and a hard disc drive 205 .
- the communication interface 204 is connected to the communication interface 44 of the gaming machine 10 through the communication line 101 .
- ROM 202 stores a system program for controlling operations of the control device, a permanent data, and the like.
- RAM 203 temporarily stores data received from each of the gaming machines 10 and data such as results of the computational operation.
- a game history of a gaming machine 10 is stored in the hard disc drive 205 , by being associated with the gaming machine identification number of each of the gaming machines 10 .
- FIG. 6 is a figure schematically showing an example of correspondence table between a gaming machine identification number and a game history.
- Each of the gaming machine identification numbers correspond to a game history based on the number of games, an accumulative number of coin-in, an accumulative number of coin-out, a payment balance in terms of the coins and a return rate of coin-out.
- CPU 201 When CPU 201 receives the number of coin-in, the number of coin-out and the gaming machine identification number from the gaming machine 10 through the communication interface 204 , a game history corresponding to the gaming machine identification number is updated. More specifically, 1 is added to the number of games, the number of coins inserted is added to the accumulative number of coin-in and the number of coins paid out is added to the accumulative number of coin-out. Furthermore, a payment balance in terms of the coins and a return rate are calculated based on the accumulative number of coin-in and the accumulative number of coin-out.
- CPU 201 determines that the number of games updated has reached a set value, CPU 201 transmits a return command signal to the gaming machine.
- the return command signal includes the accumulated number of payouts stored in hard disc drive 205 by being associated with identification information of each of the gaming machines 10 .
- FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a procedure in an authentication reading processing for a game program and a game system program executed by a mother board and a gaming board shown in FIG. 4 .
- the memory card 53 is inserted into the card slot 53 S on the gaming board 50 and GAL 54 is mounted to the IC socket 54 S.
- step S 1 - 1 and S 2 - 1 When a power supply switch is turned on in the power supply unit 45 , the mother board 40 and the gaming board 50 are activated (steps S 1 - 1 and S 2 - 1 ).
- the mother board 40 and the gaming board 50 are activated, separate processing are performed at the same time. That is, in the gaming board 50 , CPU 51 reads a preliminary authentication program stored in the boot ROM 52 and performs the preliminary authentication which in advance, prior to capturing the authentication program into the mother board 40 , confirms or certificates that the program is not altered according to the read preliminary authentication program (step S 2 - 2 ).
- the main CPU 41 executes BIOS stored in ROM 42 to expand on RAM 43 compressed data incorporated in BIOS (step S 1 - 2 ). Then, the main CPU 41 executes BIOS expanded on RAM 43 to perform diagnosis on and initialization of various kinds of the peripheral devices (step S 1 - 3 ).
- the main CPU 41 since ROM 55 on the gaming board 50 is connected to the main CPU 41 through PCI bus, the main CPU 41 not only performs reading of the authentication program stored in ROM 55 , but also stores the read authentication program into RAM 43 (step S 1 - 4 ). On this occasion, the main CPU 41 takes a checksum according to ADDSUM method (a standard check function) with the help of the function of a standard BIOS of BIOS, and by performing a confirmation processing for whether or not storage is conducted without error, stores the authentication program into RAM 43 .
- ADDSUM method a standard check function
- the main CPU 41 accesses the memory card 53 inserted into the card slot 53 S through the IDE bus, and conducts reading of the game program and the game system program from the memory card 53 .
- the main CPU 41 reads 4 bites at a time of data constituting the game program and the game system program.
- the main CPU 41 authenticates by confirming and certifying according to the authentication program stored in RAM 43 , that the read game program and game system program has not been altered (step S 1 - 5 ).
- the main CPU 41 writes and stores in RAM 43 the game program and the game system program that have been an object of authentication (have been authenticated) (steps S 1 to S 6 ).
- main CPU 41 accesses through the PCI bus to GAL 54 mounted to the IC socket 54 S, reads data for setting a payout rate from GAL 54 and writes and stores the data in RAM 43 (step S 1 - 7 ). Then, the main CPU 41 not only reads through the PCI bus country identification information stored in ROM 55 on the gaming board 50 , but also stores the read country identification information into RAM 43 (step S 1 - 8 ).
- the main CPU 41 sequentially reads and executes the game program and the game system program to such that a game is progressed.
- the main CPU 41 After the processing shown in FIG. 7 is over, the main CPU 41 performs a game mode selection processing.
- FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a game mode selection processing.
- the main CPU 41 conducts a processing for adding credits stored in RAM 43 as an interrupt processing when it receives a detection signal outputted from the coin counter 21 C in a case where the coin counter 21 C detects a coin inserted into the coin receiving slot 21 while executing the subroutine.
- FIGS. 9A and 9B are figures showing an image displayed on the lower image display panel when a game mode selection processing is executed.
- the main CPU 41 conducts a processing to display on the lower image display panel 16 an image for requesting to the player selection of a game mode (step S 3 ).
- the main CPU 41 transmits a depiction command for the game mode selection image to the graphic board 68 .
- VDP extracts image data from RAM 43 and expands the data on the video RAM to produce image data for one frame and to output the image data to the lower image display panel 16 , based on the depiction command.
- an image as shown in FIG. 9A is displayed on the lower side display panel 16 .
- FIG. 9A is a figure showing an example of game mode selection image displayed on the lower image display panel.
- numerical reference 15 15 L, 15 C and 15 R indicates display windows.
- L indicates a winning line.
- An image showing “Select a mode!!” is displayed in the upper portion of the lower image display panel 16 .
- the image is an image for requesting a player to select a game mode.
- images showing “INSURANCE” and “NO INSURANCE” are displayed in the lower portion of the lower image display panel 16 .
- the images are images indicating game mode options and the player touches a predetermined site of the touch panel 69 corresponding to a display region of the image, and is thereby enabled to input a command for selecting a game mode.
- the option “INSURANCE” corresponds to the with-insurance mode.
- a predetermined number of credits for example, number of credits equivalent to 1 dollar
- a note or a coin equivalent to the number of credits may be directly inserted.
- the return mode flag is set to the state “ON” and a game state shifts to the return mode. In the return mode, since the number of the winning lines is increased, establishment possibility of the winning combination becomes high. Therefore, in the return mode, the player can receive payout of more coins.
- a game in the with-insurance mode, a game can be played in a state where an insurance is carried for compensating all or part of a loss arising in a case where no bonus game has arisen for a long time.
- an option “NO INSURANCE” corresponds to the without-insurance mode.
- the return mode flag is not set to the state of “ON” and a game state does not shift to the payout return mode even if no bonus game has arisen for a long time after the without-insurance mode is selected.
- the main CPU 41 determines whether the with-insurance mode has been selected or not (step S 4 ). In a case where it is determined that the with-insurance mode has been selected, the main CPU conducts a processing for subtracting a predetermined number of credit from the number of credits stored in RAM 43 (step S 5 ). Thereafter, the game execution processing in the with-insurance mode is conducted (step S 6 ).
- an image showing “INSURED” is displayed in the upper left of the lower image display panel 16 , as shown in FIG. 9B .
- the image is an image showing that a game mode is in the with-insurance mode.
- step S 7 the main CPU 41 conducts the game execution processing in the without-insurance mode (step S 7 ). Since this processing is a processing almost the same as the game execution processing in the with-insurance mode (see FIG. 10 ) except that neither a processing related to transition to the return mode nor a processing related to counting of the number of games is conducted, description thereof is omitted here.
- step S 6 or S 7 the process is returned to step S 3 thereafter.
- FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a game execution processing in the with-insurance mode that is called and executed in step S 6 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 8 .
- the main CPU 41 determines whether or not a coin is BET (step S 10 ). In the processing, the main CPU 41 determines whether an input signal outputted from the 1-BET switch 26 S or the maximum BET switch 27 S has been received or not when the 1-BET button 26 or the maximum BET button 27 is operated, respectively. If it is determined that a coin has not been BET, the process returns to step S 10 .
- step S 10 if it is determined in step S 10 that a coin is BET, the main CPU 41 conducts a processing for subtracting the number of credits stored in RAM 43 according to the number of BET coins (step S 11 ). In a case where the number of BET coins is more than the number of credits stored in RAM 43 , the process returns to step S 10 without conducting subtraction on the number of credits stored in RAM 43 . In a case where the number of BET coins exceeds the upper limit (50 coins in the first embodiment) up to which a BET is possible in one game, the process advances to step S 12 without conducting a processing for subtracting the number of BET coins from the number of credits stored in RAM 43 .
- the upper limit 50 coins in the first embodiment
- the main CPU 41 determines whether the spin button 23 has been turned ON or not (step S 12 ).
- the main CPU 41 d determines, when the spin button 23 is pressed, whether an input signal outputted from the spin switch 23 S has been received or not.
- step S 10 If it is determined that the spin button 23 has not been turned ON, the process returns to step S 10 . Note that in a case where the spin button has not been turned ON (for example, in a case where a command of terminating a game has been inputted without turning ON the spin button), the main CPU 41 cancels a result of the subtracting processing in step S 11 .
- step S 10 a processing for conducting subtraction on the number of credits (step S 11 ) is conducted prior to the determination on whether the spin button has been turned ON or not (step S 12 ).
- step S 11 a processing for subtraction on the number of credits
- step S 11 may be conducted after a coin is BET (step S 10 ), determined whether the spin button 23 has been turned ON or not (step S 12 ), and when determined that the spin button 23 has been turned ON (YES in step S 12 ).
- step S 12 of FIG. 10 if it is determined that the spin button 23 has been turned ON therein, the main CPU 41 conducts a lottery processing (step S 13 ).
- the main CPU 41 executes a lottery program stored in RAM 43 (storage device) to thereby determine a code No. of the stopped reels 14 .
- a combination of symbols stop displayed is determined.
- the main CPU 41 works as winning combination determination means for determining a winning combination by a lottery.
- one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations may at first be determined by a lottery, and the combination of symbols to be stop displayed may be determined thereafter, based on the determined winning combination.
- the processing is a processing which, after all of the reels 14 starts to rotate, stops the rotating of each of the reels 14 such that a combination of symbol sequences corresponding to the winning combination determined in step S 13 is stop displayed on the winning line L. Detailed description of the processing will be given later by making reference to FIGS. 13 to 15 .
- the main CPU 41 determines whether a bonus game trigger has been established or not, that is whether “APPLE” is stop displayed in the display window 15 or hot (step S 15 ). If it is determined that the bonus game trigger has been established, the main CPU 41 (processing device) reads a program for conducting a bonus game from RAM 43 (storage device) to execute a bonus game processing (step S 16 ). Here, the first special game state is generated. Detailed description of the bonus game processing will be given later by making reference to FIG. 16 . When the processing in step S 16 is executed, the main CPU 41 functions as means for generating the first special game state.
- the main CPU 41 determines whether a winning combination has been established or not (step S 17 ). If it is determined that a winning combination has been established, the main CPU 41 conducts payout of a coin corresponding to the number of coin-in and the winning combination (step S 18 ).
- the main CPU 41 conducts a processing to add the coins to the number of credits stored in RAM 43 .
- the main CPU 41 transmits a control signal to the hopper 66 and conducts payout of a predetermined number of coins.
- the coin detecting section 67 counts the number of coins paid out from the hopper 66 and when the number of counts reaches a designated number, transmits a payout completion signal to the main CPU 41 .
- the main CPU 41 stops the driving of the hopper 66 to terminate the coin payout processing.
- step S 16 or S 18 When the processing in step S 16 or S 18 is executed, or when it is determined that no winning combination has been established (that a winning combination has failed to be established) in step S 17 , the main CPU 41 determines whether the return mode flag stored in RAM 43 is set to the state “ON” (step S 19 ) or not. If it is determined that the return mode flag has been set to the state “ON”, the main CPU 41 (processing device) reads from RAM 43 (storage device) a program for shifting a game state to the return mode, executes the return mode processing, to thus shift a game state to the return mode (step S 20 ).
- the second special game state has been generated. Detailed description will be given of the payout return mode processing later using FIG. 17 .
- the main CPU 41 when executing the processing in step S 20 , functions as means for generating the second special game state.
- step S 20 determines whether the processing in step S 20 has been executed, or if it is determined that the return mode flag has not been set to the state “ON” in step S 19 , the main CPU 41 determines whether the bonus game (step S 16 ) has been executed or not or whether a game state has shifted to the return mode (step S 20 ) or not (step S 21 ).
- step S 22 If it is determined that a bonus game has not been executed, or that a game state has not shifted to the payout return mode, the main CPU 41 executes a counting processing (step S 22 ).
- the counting processing is a processing conducted between the gaming machine 10 and the control device 200 .
- the number of coin-in and the number of coin-out for one game together with the gaming machine identification number are transmitted to the control device 200 .
- the number of games, an accumulative number of coin-in, an accumulative number of coin-out and the like are updated with respect to each gaming machine identification number.
- a return command signal is transmitted to the gaming machine 10 .
- the return command signal includes the accumulated number of payouts as data stored in hard disc drive 205 by being associated with identification information of each of the gaming machines 10 .
- the main CPU 41 when receiving the return command signal, sets the return mode flag to the state “ON” and stores the accumulated number of payouts as data.
- step S 22 After the processing in step S 22 is executed, the main CPU 41 returns the process to the processing in step S 10 and subsequently executes a game in the with-insurance mode.
- the present subroutine is completed and the process returns to the processing shown in FIG. 8 .
- a player can once again select whether a game is to be played by the with-insurance mode or the without-insurance mode.
- FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a lottery processing called and executed in step S 13 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 .
- the processing is a processing conducted by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43 with the main CPU 41 .
- the main CPU 41 executes a random number generating program included in the lottery program, and a random number value from the numerical value range of 0 to 255 is selected thereby such that each of the selected random number values correspond to each of the three reels 14 (step S 31 ).
- description will be given of a case where random numbers are generated on a program (a case where so-called software random numbers are used).
- a random number generator may be used, and random numbers may be extracted therefrom (so-called hardware random numbers may be used).
- the main CPU 41 (processing device) refers to symbol weighting determination data corresponding to payout rate setting data which is outputted from GAL 54 and stored in RAM 43 , and determines, based on the selected three random number values, code Nos. (see FIG. 3 ) for each of the reels 14 (step S 32 ).
- the code Nos. of the reels 14 correspond to code Nos. of the symbols stop displayed on the winning line L.
- the main CPU 41 determines code Nos. of the reels 14 to thereby determine a winning combination. For example, in a case where code Nos. of the reels 14 are determined “00”, “00” and “00”, it means that the main CPU 41 determined a winning combination as “JACKPOT”. Based on the code Nos. determined for each of the reels, a reel rotating control processing which will be described later is conducted. On this occasion, the main CPU 41 functions as winning combination determination means.
- FIG. 12 is a figure describing a relationship among winning combinations of plural kinds, establishment possibility of each winning combination and the number of coin-out in the first embodiment.
- the establishment possibilities of each of the winning combinations shown in FIG. 12 are of a case where a payout rate is set to 88% in a game other than a bonus game.
- the establishment possibilities shown in the figure show possibilities of the establishment of each of the shown winning combinations in such a case that code Nos. of each of the reels 14 are determined based on the selected three random number values by referring to a symbol weighting determination data. In other words, the random number values are not made to correspond to each of the winning combinations.
- An establishment possibility of a bonus game trigger is 0.5%. If a player hits the bonus game trigger, three “APPLE” symbols are stop displayed on the winning line L and a bonus game is generated. In the bonus game, executed is a free game of which the number of games is determined by a lottery.
- JACKPOT 7 An establishment possibility of “JACKPOT 7” is 0.5%. If the winning combination has been established, three “JACKPOT 7” symbols are stop displayed on the winning line L, and 30 coins per one coin-in are paid out. The lower the establishment possibility of the winning combination is, the higher the number of coin-out is set. When a combination of symbols stop displayed is not hitting any of the winning combinations shown in FIG. 12 , this is a failure, and there is no coin-out.
- FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel rotating control processing called and executed in step S 15 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 .
- This processing is a processing conducted between the main CPU 41 and the sub CPU 61 .
- the main CPU 41 transmits to the sub CPU 61 a start signal that starts the rotating of reels (step S 40 ).
- the sub CPU 61 conducts a reel rotating processing when it receives the start signal from the main CPU 41 (step S 51 ).
- the sub CPU 61 supplies a pulse to the motor driving circuit 62 .
- the pulse outputted from the sub CPU 61 is amplified by the driver 64 and supplied to each of the stepping motors 70 ( 70 L, 70 C and 7 OR).
- the stepping motors 70 rotate, thereby making the reels 14 ( 14 L, 14 C and 14 R) to rotate.
- a stepping motor 70 is a 1-2 phase excitation type stepping motor which has a step angle of 0.9 degree and requires the number of steps of 400 for one rotation. Hence, if 400 pulses are supplied to the stepping motor 70 , the reels 14 rotate once.
- the sub CPU 61 supplies to the motor driving circuit 62 pulses at a lower frequency, and the pulse frequency is gradually raised. A rotational speed of the reels 14 is thereby increased.
- the pulse frequency is controlled to be constant. As a result, the reels 14 rotate at a constant speed.
- FIGS. 14A to 14 D are side views for describing a rotating operation of a reel 14 .
- a semicircular metal plate 14 a is attached to the side surface of a reel 14 .
- the metal plate 14 a rotates together with the reel 14 .
- Twenty two symbols are depicted on the circumferential surface of the reel 14 .
- Three symbols of the twenty two symbols depicted on the circumferential surface of the reel 14 can be visually recognizable through the display window 15 formed in front of the reel 14 .
- the arrow mark of a heavy line in the figure indicates a rotating direction of the reel 14 .
- a proximity sensor 65 a is provided on the side of the reel 14 .
- the proximity sensor 65 a is used to detect the metal plate 14 a .
- the proximity sensor 65 a does not rotate nor move even if the reel 14 rotates.
- FIG. 14A shows a position of the meal plate 14 a when the metal plate 14 a starts being detected by the proximity sensor 65 a (hereinafter also referred to as a position A). If the reel 14 rotates when the metal plate 14 a is at the position A, the metal plate 14 a moves to a position shown in FIG. 14B .
- FIG. 14B shows a position of the metal plate 14 a when the metal plate 14 a is being detected by the proximity sensor 65 a (hereinafter also referred to as a position B). If the reel 14 rotates when the metal plate 14 a is at the position B, the metal plate 14 a moves to a position shown in FIG. 14C .
- FIG. 14C shows a position of the metal plate 14 a when the metal plate 14 a will no longer be detected by the proximity sensor 65 a (hereinafter also referred to as a position C).
- FIG. 14D shows a position of the metal plate 14 a when the metal plate 14 a is not detected by the proximity sensor 65 a (hereinafter also referred to as a position D). If the reel 14 further rotates, a position of the metal plate 14 a returns to the position A. As described above, together with the rotating of the reel 14 , the metal plate 14 a changes its position in the order from the position A, to the position B, to the position C, to the position D, to the position A and so forth.
- the proximity sensor 65 a constitutes an index detecting circuit 65 (see FIG. 3 ).
- a state of the index detecting circuit 65 is “High” during the period when the metal plate 14 a moves from the position A to the position B and to the position C
- a state of the index detecting circuit 65 is “Low” during the period when the metal plate 14 a moves from the position C to the position D and to the position A.
- the sub CPU 61 assigns a rise from “Low” to “High” as an index (origin) 1 and a fall from “High” to “Low” as an index (origin) 2 to thereby recognize the rotating position of the reel 14 .
- the main CPU 40 after transmitting in step 40 a start signal to the sub CPU 61 , executes representation to be executed while the reels are rotating (step S 41 ).
- the process is a processing which conducts display of an image on the lower image display panel 16 and output of a sound from the speaker 29 over a period (for example, 3 seconds) determined according to a result and the like of the lottery processing (step S 13 in FIG. 10 ).
- the main CPU 40 determines whether it is the timing at which a command is to be issued so as to stop the rotating of the reel 14 , or not (step S 42 ).
- the timing at which a command is issued so as to stop rotation of a reel 14 is a timing before the time when the representation to be executed while the reels are rotating is terminated, which is an interval having the minimum time necessary for stopping the rotating of the reel 14 . Note that the minimum time necessary for stopping the rotating of the reel 14 is determined in advance.
- step S 42 If it is determined in step S 42 that it is not the timing at which the command to stop the rotating of the reel 14 is to be issued, the process returns to the processing in step S 42 and there presentation to be executed while the reels are rotating continues to be conducted. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S 42 that it is the timing at which the command to stop the rotating of the reel 14 is to be issued, the main CPU 41 transmits to the sub CPU 61 a code No. of the reel which is stored in RAM 43 (step S 43 ). When the sub CPU 61 receives a code No. of the reel from the main CPU 41 , the code No. is converted to a stopping position of the reel (the number of steps) from an index, based on a correspondence table between the number or steps and the code Nos. stored in ROM (not shown in the figure) included in the sub CPU 61 (step S 52 ).
- FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence table between the number of steps and the code No. Each of the code Nos. are related to an index and the number of steps.
- Each code No. corresponds to the symbols depicted on the circumferential surfaces of the reels 14 (see FIG. 3 ) and symbols of code Nos. “00” to “10” correspond to the index 1 . Moreover, symbols of code Nos. “11” to “21” correspond to the index 2 .
- the number of steps in the correspondence table shown in FIG. 15 is the number of steps with the index 1 as a reference. For example, if a code No. is “08”, a stopping position of the reel is at 145 steps from the index 1 . If a code No. is “12”, a stopping position of the reel is at 218 steps from the index 1 .
- the sub CPU 61 executes a reel stopping processing (step S 53 ).
- the sub CPU 61 detects a rise in the index detecting circuit 65 from “Low” to “High” (the index 1 ) on each of the reels 14 , and supplies to the motor driving circuit 65 pulses corresponding to the number of steps which were converted in step S 52 from a code No. at a timing at which the index 1 is detected, and supply of pulses is ceased thereafter.
- step S 52 when, in step S 52 , the stopping positions of the reels are determined to be 145 steps from the index 1 , the sub CPU 61 supplies 145 pulses to the motor driving circuit 65 at a timing at which the index 1 is detected, and the supply of pulses is terminated thereafter. Furthermore, when, in step S 52 , the stopping positions of the reels are determined to be 218 steps from the index 1 , the sub CPU 61 supplies 218 pulses to the motor driving circuit 65 at a timing at which the index 1 is detected. As a result, the reels 14 stop at the code No. determined in step 32 of FIG. 11 and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination determined in step S 32 of FIG. 11 is stop displayed on the winning line L. On the other hand, the main CPU 41 terminates the representation to be executed while the reels are rotating. After the processing in steps S 44 and S 53 are over, the present reel rotating control processing is completed.
- step S 43 when an index corresponding to the code No. transmitted in step S 43 is different from an index detected by the index detecting circuit 65 when the rotating of the reels 14 stop, this means that an out-of-order state occurred on the reels 14 ; therefore, the main CPU 41 conducts a processing for displaying an error message on the lower image display panel 16 to temporarily stop a game.
- the game is temporarily stopped.
- FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a bonus game processing called and executed in step S 16 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 .
- the main CPU 41 determines a number T of bonus games from 10 to 25 games, based on a random number value obtained by executing a random number generation program included in a lottery program stored in RAM 43 (step S 60 ).
- the main CPU 41 stores as data into RAM 43 the number of games of the determined bonus games.
- step S 61 the main CPU 41 conducts a lottery processing (step S 61 ) and a reel rotating control processing (step S 63 ).
- step S 61 is a processing almost the same as the processing described using FIG. 11 .
- step S 63 is a processing almost the same as the processing described using FIG. 13 . Since descriptions of these processing have already been given, descriptions thereof are omitted herein.
- the main CPU 41 determines whether a bonus game trigger has been established or not, that is, whether three “APPLE” are stop displayed in the display windows 15 or not (step S 64 ). If it is determined that the bonus game trigger has been established, the number t of additional games of the bonus game is determined in a lottery (step S 65 ) and the determined number t of additional games is added to the number T of games of the bonus game (step S 66 ). Thus, when a bonus game is hit during the bonus game, a remaining number of bonus games increases. More specifically, for example, in a case where a game state shifts to 20 bonus games for the first time, and hits 17 bonus games upon conducting 12 of the bonus games, another 25 bonus games (20 bonus games ⁇ 12 bonus games+17 bonus games) are to be conducted.
- step S 67 the main CPU 41 determines whether a winning combination has been established or not. If it is determined that the winning combination has been established, the main CPU 41 conducts payout of coins corresponding to the number of coin-in and the winning combination (step S 68 ). Since the processing is similar to the processing in step S 18 and description thereof has already been given, the description of the present processing is omitted herein.
- step S 66 or S 68 the main CPU 41 reads the number T of bonus games stored in RAM 43 , and one bonus game is subtracted from the read number T of bonus games. The number T of bonus games after the subtraction is again stored into RAM 43 (step S 69 ).
- the main CPU 41 determines whether the number T of bonus games reaches the number of games determined in step S 60 or not (step S 70 ). More specifically, it is determined whether the number T of games stored in RAM 43 has become 0 or not, and if the number T of games is not 0, that is, if it is determined that the number of bonus games played does not reach the number of games which were determined in step S 60 , the process returns to step S 61 and the above-mentioned processing is repeated.
- a number-of-games reset signal is transmitted to the control device 200 (step S 71 ), and the present subroutine is completed thereafter.
- the number-of-games reset signal includes the gaming machine identification information of the gaming machine 10 , and CPU 201 of the control device 200 , when receiving the number-of-games reset signal, resets to 0 the number of games of which is stored in the hard disc drive 205 by being made to correspond to the gaming machine identification information included in the number-of-games reset signal.
- FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a return mode processing called and executed in step S 20 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 .
- the main CPU 41 determines the number P of total payout in the return mode according to the payment balance in terms of coins transmitted from the control device 200 as the return command signal and stored in RAM 43 (step S 120 ).
- the number corresponding to 50% of the payment balance in terms of coins is set as the number P of total payout in the return mode. For example, when the payment balance in terms of coins is “ ⁇ 10000”, the number P of total payout in the return mode is set as 5000. However, when the number P of total payout determined according to the payment balance in terms of coins does not reach a predetermined lower limit value (“3000”, for example), a predetermined number is set as the number P of total payout.
- the main CPU 41 extracts the image data showing the winning line from the image data stored in RAM 43 , and displays five winning lines on the lower image display panel 16 based on the image data (step S 121 ).
- the image data showing the winning lines is contained in the game program read from the memory card 53 and stored in RAM 43 .
- the main CPU 41 determines the image to be displayed on the lower image display panel 16 . Then, the main CPU 41 transmits to the graphic board 68 a depiction command based on the result determined.
- VDP extracts from RAM 43 image data showing five winning lines, expands the data on the video RAM, produces image data for one frame and outputs the image data to the lower image display panel 16 . As a result, for example, images as shown in FIGS. 18 are displayed on the lower image display panel 16 .
- FIGS. 18 is a figure showing an example of image displayed on the lower image display panel when a game state shifts to the return mode (when the second special game state is generated).
- Numerical reference 15 ( 15 L, 15 C and 15 R) in the figures indicates display windows. L indicates a winning lines displayed before the game state shifts to the return mode.
- an image showing “BONUS !”, together with two images showing fireworks are displayed.
- An image showing “TIME OF PLAY 600” is also displayed in the lower portion of the lower image display panel 16 . This image is an image showing that the number of games reached 600 ).
- the main CPU 41 determines whether or not a coins is BET (step S 122 ). When it is determined that the coins is not BET, the process returns to step S 122 . On the other hand, when it is determined that the coins is BET, the main CPU 41 executes processing for subtracting the number of credit (step S 123 ), Then, the main CPU 41 determins whether the spin button 23 is turned ON or not (S 124 ). When it is determined that the spin button 23 is not turned ON, the process returns to step S 140 . On the other hand, when it is determined that the spin button 23 is turned ON, the process advances to step S 125 . In addition, the processes in steps S 122 to S 124 are the same processes as those in steps S 10 to S 12 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 18 .
- step S 125 the main CPU 41 executes the random number generation program contained in the lottery program to select a random number value corresponding to each of the three reels 14 from the numerical value range of 0 to 255 (step S 125 ). Then, the main CPU 41 refers to the data for setting a payout rate outputted from the GAL 54 and stored in RAM 43 and determines the code NO. (see FIG. 3 ) of each reel 14 based on the selected three random number values (step S 126 ).
- step S 127 the main CPU 41 executes reel rotating control processing (S 127 ). Since this process is the same as that of step S 14 (see FIGS. 13 to 15 ) of the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 , its description will be omitted here.
- the main CPU 41 determines whether or not the winning combination is established on any one of the five winning lines (step S 128 ). When it is determined that the winning combination is not established on any one of the five winning lines, the process returns to step S 122 . On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning combination is established on any one of the five winning lines, the main CPU 41 executes coin-out of number Q corresponding to established winning combination (step S 129 ).
- the number Q is provided by multiplying a predetermined number of payout for the established winning combination and the number of the inserted coins. In addition, when the plural winning combinations are established, the number Q is provided by multiplying the determined number of payout to all of the established winning combinations and the number of the inserted coins.
- the main CPU updates the accumulated number R of payout in the return mode (step S 130 ).
- the accumulated number R of payout in the return mode is stored in RAM 43 as data and the main CPU 41 reads out the accumulated number R of payout stored in RAM 43 in step S 130 and adds the number Q to the number R and stores the given number R in RAM 43 .
- the main CPU 41 determines whether or not the bonus game trigger is established on any one of the five winning lines (step S 131 ). When it is determined that the bonus game trigger is not established on any one of the five winning lines, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not the accumulated number R of payout is equal to or more than the number P of total payout (step S 132 ). When it is determined that the accumulated number R of payout is not equal to or more than the number P of total payout, the process returns to step S 122 . On the other hand, when it is determined that the accumulated number R of payout is equal to or more than the number P of total payout, the main CPU 41 sets the return mode flag to “OFF” (step S 134 ) and terminates this subroutine.
- step S 131 when it is determined that the bonus game trigger is established on any one of the five winning lines in step S 131 , the bonus game processing (see FIG. 16 ) is executed (step S 133 ). Then the main CPU 41 sets the return mode flag to “OFF” (step S 134 ), and terminates this subroutine. In addition, when the processing in FIG. 17 is completed, the number of winning lines becomes one again and the normal game is continued to be played.
- FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a counting processing called and executed in step S 22 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 .
- the processing is a processing conducted between the main CPU 41 of a gaming machine 10 and CPU 201 of the control device 200 .
- the main CPU 41 transmits by the communication interface 44 the number of coin-in and the number of coin-out stored in RAM 43 together with the gaming machine identification number to the control device 200 through the communication line 101 (step S 90 ).
- the number of coin-in and the number of coin-out transmitted to the control device 200 from the gaming machine 10 are those of the game concerned.
- the processing in step S 90 is a processing in which the main CPU 41 (processing device) transmits the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in the main RAM 43 (storage device) to the control device 200 through the communication line 101 , each time a game is played.
- the main CPU 41 functions as means for transmitting the identification information of the gaming machine 10 to the control device 200 through the communication line 101 .
- the CPU 201 of the control device 200 when receiving from the gaming machine 10 the number of coin-in, the number of coin-out and the gaming machine identification number through the communication line 101 by the communication interface 204 , updates the number of games, the accumulative number of coin-in and the accumulative number of coin-out corresponding to the received gaming machine identification number (step S 100 ), by choosing the data, which are made to correspond to each of the gaming machine identification numbers, of the number of games, the accumulative number of coin-in, the accumulative number of coin-out stored in the hard disc drive 205 (see FIG. 6 ).
- CPU 201 determined whether the number of games after the updating has reached the set value or not (step S 101 ). If it is determined that the number of games after the updating has not reached the set value, the subroutine is terminated.
- step S 101 determines whether the number of games after the updating has reached the set value. If it is determined in step S 101 that the number of games after the updating has reached the set value, the CPU 201 transmits a return command signal showing the payment balance in terms of coins (step S 103 ). Then, the CPU 201 resets to 0 the number of games stored in hard disc drive 205 by being associated with identification information of each of the gaming machines 10 (step S 104 ).
- step S 91 When the main CPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 receives the return command signal transmitted from the control device 200 in step S 103 , it sets the return mode flag to “ON” (step S 91 ).
- the processing in step S 91 is a processing for receiving the return command signal transmitted from the control device 200 when the number of games accumulatively counted by the control device 200 based on the identification information of the gaming machine 10 reaches the set value.
- the main CPU 41 functions as means for receiving the command signal transmitted from the control device 200 in step S 91 .
- the main CPU 41 stores the data showing the payment balance in terms of coins contained in the return command signal in RAM 43 (step S 92 ). Thereafter, the present processing is terminated.
- the present invention is, however, not limited to this example.
- the second special game state may be generated (the game state shifts to the return mode). This is because in such a case, a player can be urged to insert game media up to the upper limit and a facility such as a casino and the like can increase a profit.
- the second special game state may be generated not when the number of games reaches the set value, but when the number of inserted game media is at the upper limit value for a game played by a player when the number of games in which insertion of game media is conducted to the upper limit value reaches a set value. This is because, in such a case, it can be prevented from a small number of game media to be inserted in a game, thereby leading to a fact that the second special game state is generated by the spending of only a small number of game media in total.
- a gaming machine 10 including: the main CPU 41 (processing device); RAM 43 (storage device); symbol display means containing the reels 14 , the stepping motor 70 and the like, is a gaming machine 10 connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 which accumulatively counts the number of games in each gaming machine 10 of plural gaming machines 10 , and wherein the main CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43 (see FIG. 11 ); a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program(see FIGS.
- a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when a combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program (see FIG. 16 ); a processing transmitting through the communication line to the control device 200 the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in RAM 43 each time a game is played (step S 90 in FIG. 19 ); a processing for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games accumulatively counted, based on the identification information of the gaming machine, by the control device 200 reaches a set value is established (step S 91 in FIG.
- a gaming machine 10 connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 which accumulatively counts the number of games for each gaming machine 10 of plural gaming machines 10 comprising: winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for determining a winning combination by lottery; symbol display means (for example, the reels 14 , the stepping motor 70 and the like) for executing change display and stop display based on a result of executing the lottery program; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for transmitting the identification information of the gaming machine 10 through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 each time a game is played; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device 200 when a condition that the number of games accumulatively counted by the control device 200 based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a
- a game state shifts to the return mode without fail by receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device 200 when the number of games counted in the control device 200 reaches a set value. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the bonus game is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, a game state shifts to the return mode as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the gaming machine 10 is connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 and the control device 200 counts a number of games in the gaming machine 10 , and determines whether a game state is to be shifted to the return mode or not (whether the second special game state is to be generated or not).
- the gaming machine 10 is, however, not necessarily required to be those using a network and may be standalone.
- a stand-alone gaming machine 10 includes: the main CPU 41 (processing device); RAM 43 (storage device); symbol display device containing the reels 14 , the stepping motor 70 and the like, wherein the main CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43 ; a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program (see FIGS.
- the gaming machine 10 comprises: winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for determining a winning combination by a lottery; symbol display means (for example, the reels 14 , the stepping motor 70 and the like) for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for counting accumulatively the number of games each time a game is played; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value has been established; and means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for executing the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) in which the number of winning lines is increased to 5 when said condition is determined to have been established.
- winning combination determining means for example, the main CPU 41
- the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) is executed when the number of games reached the set value
- the present invention is not limited to this embodiment.
- the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) may be executed in the gaming machine 10 of the present invention.
- Such a gaming machine 10 including: the main CPU 41 (processing device); RAM 43 (storage device); symbol display device containing the reels 14 , the stepping motor 70 and the like, is a gaming machine 10 connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 which accumulatively counts the payment balance in terms of the game media in each gaming machine 10 of plural gaming machines 10 , and wherein the main CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43 ; a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program; a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing transmitting through the communication line to the control device 200 the payment balance in terms of the game media together with the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in RAM 43 each
- a processing for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively counted, based on the identification information of the gaming machine by the control device 200 becomes equal to or below a set value is established(step S 91 in FIG. 19 ); and a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for executing the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) in which the number of winning lines is increased to 5 based on the command signal, and executing the program (see FIG. 17 ).
- a gaming machine 10 connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 which accumulatively counts the payment balance in terms of the game media for each gaming machine 10 of plural gaming machines 10 comprising: winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for determining a winning combination by lottery; symbol display means (for example, the reels 14 , the stepping motor 70 and the like) for executing change display and stop display based on a result of executing the lottery program; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for transmitting through the communication line to the control device 200 the payment balance in terms of the game media together with the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in RAM 43 each time a game is played; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively
- a game state shifts to the return mode without fail by receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device 200 when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively counted, based on the identification information of the gaming machine by the control device 200 becomes equal to or below a set value is established. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the bonus game is likely to be generated.
- the above mentioned gaming machine 10 is connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 and the control device 200 counts a number of coins in the gaming machine 10 , and determines whether a game state is to be shifted to the return mode or not (whether the second special game state is to be generated or not).
- the gaming machine 10 is, however, not necessarily required to be those using a network and may be standalone.
- a stand-alone gaming machine 10 includes: the main CPU 41 (processing device); RAM 43 (storage device); symbol display device containing the reels 14 , the stepping motor 70 and the like, wherein the main CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43 ; a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program; a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing counting accumulatively the payment balance in terms of the game media each time a game is played; a processing determining whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below a set value is established; and a processing reading from the storage device a program for executing the transition to the return mode (generating
- a gaming machine 10 comprising: winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for determining a winning combination by lottery; symbol display means (for example, the reels 14 , the stepping motor 70 and the like) for executing change display and stop display based on a result of executing the lottery program; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for counting accumulatively the payment balance in terms of the game media each time a game is played; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for determining whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media reaches the set value has been established; and means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for executing the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) in which the number of winning lines is increased to 5 when said condition is determined to have been established.
- winning combination determination means
- the main CPU 41 executes a program for shifting to the return mode in which the a number of coins corresponding to the accumulatively counted number of the games is paid out. That is, it is preferable that the means for generating the second special game state (for example, the main CPU 41 ) pays out a number of the game media corresponding to the accumulatively counted number of the games in the second special game state until the second special game state is generated.
- the player can receive a profit according to the number of game played by the player in the second special game state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- the gaming machine when a condition that the accumulatively counted number of the games reaches a set value is established, the gaming machine generates a second special game state in which the player can play the game in an advantageous game state.
- the second special game state is a game state generated only when the above condition is established in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
- the processing in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is almost the same as that in the gaming machine-according to the first embodiment except for the return mode processing (in FIGS. 17 and 18 ) called and executed in step S 20 in the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 .
- the return mode processing in FIGS. 17 and 18
- step S 20 in the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 .
- a return mode process will be only described and other processings are not described.
- FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the return mode processing in the second embodiment.
- a free game is played.
- the total number of coin-out to be paid out is determined at the beginning.
- the free game is finished when the total number of coin-out is all paid out.
- a bonus game trigger is established, a predetermined number of payout is added to the total number of payout. Therefore, in the return mode corresponding to the second embodiment, when the bonus game trigger is established, the player can get more coins.
- the winning combination of the small number of payout coins is established more often, the larger the number of games becomes, so that the possibility of establishment of the bonus game trigger becomes high.
- the subroutine shown in FIG. 20 is executed when the main CPU 41 executes a program for shifting to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) stored in RAM 43 .
- the program is an exclusive program for the return mode and it is executed only in the return mode.
- the main CPU 41 determines the number P of total payout in the return mode based on the payment balance in terms of coins transmitted from a control device 200 as a return command signal and stored in RAM 43 (step S 200 ).
- the number corresponding to 50% of the payment balance in terms of coins is set as the number P of total payout in the return mode. For example, when the payment balance in terms of coins is “ ⁇ 10000”, the number P of total payout in the return mode is set as 5000. However, when the number P of total payout determined based on the payment balance in terms of coins does not reach a predetermined lower limit value (for example, 3000), a predetermined number is set as the number P of total payout.
- a predetermined lower limit value for example, 3000
- the main CPU 41 executes a random numbers generation program included in a lottery program to select a random number values corresponding to each of three reels 14 from the numerical value range of 0 to 255 (step S 201 ). Then, the main CPU 41 refers to payout rate setting data which is outputted from GAL 54 and stored in RAM 43 , and determines, based on the selected three random number values, code Nos. (see FIG. 3 ) (step S 202 ).
- the payout rate setting data is an exclusive data for the return mode and it is used in the return mode only.
- the winning combination is determined in step S 202 .
- FIG. 21 is a figure schematically showing a relation between a plural winning combination, establishment possibility of the winning combination and the number of payout in the return mode according to the second embodiment.
- the establishment possibility shown in the figure shows the establishment possibility of the winning combination when the code No. of each reel 14 is determined based on the three random number values referring to the symbol weighting data. That is, the random number value does not correspond to each winning combination.
- Establishment possibility of the bonus game trigger is 0.5%.
- the bonus game trigger is won in the return mode, the three “APPLE” symbols are stop displayed on the winning line and the number P of payout is added to the number P of total payout.
- the coins are not paid out and a bonus game is not generated.
- the added number P of payout is previously set as 3000.
- the number of payout is given by subtracting accumulated number R of payout in the return mode from the total number of payout.
- step S 203 the main CPU 41 executes a rotating control processing of the reel. Since content of this processing is the same as that in step S 14 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 (see FIGS. 13 to 15 ), its description will be omitted.
- the correspondence relationship between the plural kinds of the winning combinations and their number of payout is stored as data in RAM 43 .
- the data (referred to as the number of payout data occasionally hereinafter) is an exclusive data for the return mode, therefore, it is used only when a game shifts to the return mode.
- the main CPU 41 determines whether a bonus game trigger has been established (hit) or not, that is whether “APPLE” is stop displayed in the display window 15 or not (step S 204 ) If it is determined that the bonus game trigger has been established, the main CPU 41 refers to the number of payout data (see FIG. 21 ) stored in RAM 43 and determines the number P of payout to be added to the number P of total payout (step S 205 ). Then, the main CPU 41 reads out the number P of total payout determined in step S 200 and stored in RAM 43 , adds the number P of payout determined in step S 205 to the number P of total payout and stores the given number P of total payout in RAM 43 (step S 206 ).
- step S 208 the main CPU 41 executes coin-out of number Q corresponding to established winning combination (including a lost condition) (step S 208 ).
- the coin-out of number Q in step S 208 is determined by referring to the number of payout data (see FIG. 21 ) stored in RAM 43 .
- the main CPU 41 updates the accumulated number R of payout in the return mode by adding the number Q of payout determined in step S 208 to the given accumulated number R of payout stored in RAM 43 in the return mode, and stores it in RAM 43 (step S 209 ).
- step S 210 the main CPU 41 determines whether the accumulated number R of payout is equal to or more than the number P of total payout or not (step S 210 ). When it is determined that the accumulated number R of payout is not equal to or more than the number P of total payout, the operation is returned to step S 201 . On the other hand, it is determined that the accumulated number R of payout is equal to or more than the number P of total payout, the main CPU 41 sets a return mode flag to “OFF” (step S 211 ), and terminates this subroutine.
- the gaming machine 10 including: the main CPU 41 (processing device ), and RAM 43 (storage device), is a gaming machine 10 connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 which accumulatively counts the number of games every gaming machine 10 in each gaming machine 10 of plural gaming machines 10 , and wherein the main CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43 ; a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when a determined winning combination is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing transmitting through the communication line to the control device 200 the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in RAM 43 each time a game is played; a processing for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games accumulatively counted, based on the identification information of the gaming machine by the control device 200 reaches a set value is established; and
- the gaming machine 10 comprises: winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for determining a winning combination by a lottery; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for generating the first special game state which is a game state advantageous to the player when the determined winning combination is the special winning combination; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for transmitting through the communication line to the control device 200 the identification information of the gaming machine 10 each time a game is played; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for receiving the command signal transmitted from the control device 200 when the condition that the number of games accumulatively counted by the control device 200 based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established.
- winning combination determining means for example, the main CPU 41
- the gaming machine 10 comprises: winning combination determining means (for
- transition to the return mode that is the advantageous state for the player is executed. Therefore, even if the bonus game is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, transition of the return mode is executed as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the return mode is shifted only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented that the player who used many coins feels frustrated, raises distrust, or loses interest in the game.
- the gaming machine 10 is connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 and the control device 200 counts a number of games in the gaming machine 10 , and determines whether a game state is to be shifted to the return mode or not (whether the second special game state is to be generated or not).
- the gaming machine 10 is, however, not necessarily required to be those using a network and may be standalone.
- a stand-alone gaming machine 10 includes: the main CPU 41 (processing device) and RAM 43 (storage device); wherein the main CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43 ; a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when a determined winning combination is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing for accumulatively counting the number of games each time the game is played; a processing for determining whether a condition that the number of games reaches the set value is established or not; and a processing for reading a program for shifting to the return mode that is generated only in a case where the above condition is established when it is determined that above condition is established from RAM 43 , and executing the program.
- the gaming machine 10 comprises; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for determining the winning combination by a lottery; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to the player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for accumulatively counting the number of games each time the game is played; means for determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for generating a second special game state which is a game state advantageous to the player and is generated only when it is determined that the above condition is established.
- the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) is executed when the number of games reached the set value
- the present invention is not limited to this embodiment.
- the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) may be executed in the gaming machine 10 of the present invention.
- Such gaming machine 10 including: the main CPU 41 (processing device); RAM 43 (storage device), is a gaming machine 1 connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 which accumulatively counts the payment balance in terms of coins in each gaming machine 10 of plural gaming machines 10 , and wherein the main CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43 ; a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when the predetermined winning combination is a special winning combination “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing transmitting through the communication line to the control device 200 the payment balance in terms of coins together with the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in RAM 43 each time a game is played; a processing for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the payment balance in terms of coins accumulatively counted by the control device 200 , based on the payment balance in terms of the coins in a game played by the player becomes
- the gaming machine 10 comprises: means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for determining the winning combination by a lottery; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to the player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for transmitting through the communication line to the control device 200 the identification information of the gaming machine 10 each time a game is played; means (the main CPU 41 , for example) for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device 200 when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively counted by the control device 200 based on the identification information of the gaming machine becomes below the set value is established; and means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established.
- transition to the return mode that is the advantageous state for the player is executed. Therefore, even if the bonus game is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, transition of the return mode is executed as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of coins becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game.
- the gaming machine 10 is connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 and the control device 200 counts the payment balance in terms of coins in the gaming machine 10 , and determines whether a game state is to be shifted to the return mode or not (whether the second special game state is to be generated or not).
- the gaming machine 10 is, however, not necessarily required to be those using a network and may be standalone.
- Such a gaming machine 10 includes: the main CPU 41 (processing device) and RAM 43 (storage device); wherein the main CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43 ; a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game when a determined winning combination is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing for accumulatively counting the payment balance in terms of coins each time the game is played; a processing for determining whether a condition that the payment balance in terms of coins becomes equal to or below the set value is established or not; and a processing for reading a program for shifting to the return mode that is generated only in a case where the above condition is established when it is determined that above condition is established from RAM 43 , and executing the program.
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43 a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game
- the gaming machine 10 comprises: winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for determining a winning combination by a lottery; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for generating the first special game state which is a game state advantageous to the player when the determined winning combination is the special winning combination; means (for example, the main CPU 41 ) for accumulatively counting the payment balance in terms of the game media each time the game is played; means for determining whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value is established; and means for generating the second special game state which is a game state advantageous to the player and is generated only when it is determined that the above condition is established.
- the main CPU 41 executes a program to make the transition to the return mode in which the coins are paid out according to the accumulatively counted number of the games. That is, it is preferable that the means for generating the second special game state (the main CPU 41 , for example) payouts the number of the game media in the second special game state according to the accumulatively counted the number of games until the second special game state is generated.
- such gaming machine 10 for example, when the number of games accumulatively counted until a game shifts to the return mode is “600”, 6000 coins corresponding to ten times the number of the game media are paid out. Thus, the player can be received profit corresponding to the number of games the player played in the second special game state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- presentation in the return mode may be only for the return mode.
- an exclusive presentation data for the return mode only is stored in the storage device (for example, RAM 43 ).
- the presentation data includes image data, audio data, data for defining a lighting pattern of a lamp or LED and the like.
- a relationship between the winning combination in the return mode and the number of payout in terms of the game media may be used exclusively for the return mode.
- the number of payout data only for the return mode (data showing the relationship between the winning combination and the number of payout in terms of the game media) is stored in the storage device (for example, RAM 43 ).
- the establishment possibility of the winning combination in the return mode may be only for the return mode.
- the GAL 54 is configured such that only payout setting data for the return mode is outputted when predetermined data is inputted.
- the mystery bonus may be executed in the bonus game as the first special game state
- the mystery bonus in which the presentation image only for the return mode is displayed on the lower image display panel 16 may be executed in the return mode as the second special game state.
- a free game may be executed in the bonus game as the first special game state, and a free game whose presentation mode is changed when the remaining number of the games reaches a predetermined set value may be performed in the return mode as the special game state.
- the free game whose presentation mode is changed when the number of the remaining number of the games reaches a predetermined set value includes the following free game.
- brightness of the lower image display panel (transparent liquid crystal panel) 16 provided in front of the reel 14 is increased when the remaining number of the games reaches 30 games.
- presentation concerning the belly glass 34 may be performed by lighting or flashing the LED or the lamp, provided that the LED or the lamp is provided on the rear side of the belly glass 34 .
- the return mode as the second special game state only a presentation image may be changed with the establishment possibility of the bonus game as the first special game state and the winning combination remaining unchanged. Furthermore, in the bonus game as the first special game state, only the free game may be played, and in the return mode as the second special game state, one game may be selected from the several kinds of the games and the selected game may be performed.
- a game state shifts to the return mode when the return mode flag has been set to the state “ON”, without other conditions being established there after.
- the present invention is, however, not limited to this example and, for example, a game state may shift to the return mode when a predetermined condition has been met after the return mode flag is set to the state “ON”.
- the predetermined condition for transition to the return mode is not particularly limited, and may include, for example, establishment of a bonus game trigger, stop display of a predetermined combination of symbols, and of the like conditions.
- step S 14 in FIG. 10 description has been given of a case where symbols are stop displayed (step S 14 in FIG. 10 ), a processing is conducted based on the stop displayed combination of symbols (steps S 15 to S 20 in FIG. 10 ), and the number of games is counted (step S 22 in FIG. 10 ) thereafter.
- the timing may be a timing at which BET of a coin is conducted (after step S 10 or S 11 in FIG. 10 ) or a timing at which the spin button is turned ON (after step S 12 in FIG. 10 ).
- the number of games may be counted at a predetermined timing that is in the period from the time when display of a change in symbol is started, to the time when symbol sequences are stop displayed, and a processing based on the stop displayed combination of symbols has been conducted (for example, a timing at which symbol sequences are stop displayed). Note that a timing at which a payment balance in terms of game media can be the same as described above.
- step S 15 in FIG. 10 in the period from the time when the return mode flag is set to the state “ON” (step S 22 in FIG. 10 ), to the time when transition to the return mode is conducted (step S 20 in FIG. 10 ), transitions to the return mode is further conducted after the bonus game is generated (step S 16 in FIG. 10 ).
- a gaming machine generates the first special game state based on the a special winning combination, and further generates the second special game state, in a case where the special winning combination is established in the period from the time when the number of games reaches a set value, to the time when the second special game state is generated.
- the present invention is not limited to this example.
- a special winning combination is established in the period from the time when the number of games reaches a set value, to the time when the second special game state is generated, only the first special game state may be generated.
- a player can earn a profit in the first special game state or the second special game state without fail when a game is played until the number of games reaches the set value.
- the above embodiment is one of the embodiments of the present invention.
- the following processing has only to be conducted instead of the processing shown in FIG. 10 .
- FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing another example of a subroutine of a game execution processing.
- the same numerical references are assigned to steps which conduct processing similar to those in the flowchart shown in FIG. 10 .
- step S 15 determines whether a bonus game trigger has been established or not (step S 15 ) and if it is determined that the bonus game trigger has been established, a bonus game processing is executed (step S 16 ). Then, it is determined whether a return mode flag is set to the state “ON” or not (step S 25 ) and if the return mode flag is set to “ON”, the return mode flag is set to the state “OFF” (step S 26 ).
- step S 21 is performed there after and thus the present subroutine is completed. Since the other processing are processing similar to those described in FIG. 10 , descriptions thereof are omitted here. In the subroutine shown in FIG.
- step S 10 after a coins is BET (step S 10 ), in a case where it is determined whether the spin button 23 has been turned ON or not (step S 12 ), and if it is determined that the spin button has been turned ON (YES in step S 12 ), a processing for subtracting the number of credits (step S 11 ) may be conducted, as in the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 .
- step S 22 A more specific description of the processing shown in FIG. 22 will be given here with a case where a set value is 600.
- step S 22 the number of games reaches 600 and a return mode flag has been established, if a bonus game trigger has been established (step S 15 ) in the 601st game, the bonus game is generated (step S 16 ) but transition to the return mode is not performed (steps S 25 and S 26 ).
- step S 19 and S 20 transition to the return mode is conducted.
- a bonus game is generated or transition to the return mode is performed without fail, when the number of games reaches a set value.
- the present invention in a case where a special winning combination has been established in the period from the time when the number of games reaches a set value, to the time when the second special game state is generated, only the second special game state may be generated, or alternatively, either the first special game state or the second special game state may be generated depending on a game situation and the like.
- An embodiment similar to the above-mentioned embodiment can also be adopted in a case where the second special game state is generated according to a payment balance in terms of game media.
- a special winning combination has been established in the period from the time when a payment balance in terms of game media is equal to or less than a set value
- to the time when the second special game state is generated only the first special game state may be generated, only the second special game state may be generated, or either the first special game state or the second special game state may be generated depending on a game situation and the like.
- a return situation to a player may be simply as such that a predetermined number of game media is paid out as an exclusive bonus only in a case where the following condition is established when the condition in which number of games reaches a set value is established. It may alternatively be a situation that when a condition in which the number of games reaches a set value is established, the return mode as the second special game state, allowing a player to have a privilege in a similar manner to the first special game state such as a free game, a second game, a mystery game and the like, can be set, and a predetermined number of game media is paid out by one of the above-mentioned game mode.
- the embodiment conducted in the second special game state is not to be conducted in the first special game state and the payout in that embodiment is to be the special bonus only when the above condition is established.
- a timing at which a predetermined number of game media is paid out is not limited to such a timing at which one game is completed and symbol sequences are stop displayed as in the mystery game described above, and for example, game media may be immediately paid out when the number of games reaches a set value.
- a method for paying out a predetermined number of game media is also not particularly limited, and for example, coins may be actually paid out, the number of credits may be increased, or a ticket such as a ticket with a bar code may be issued.
Abstract
A gaming machine of the present invention includes: output means capable of outputting an image or a sound; winning combination determination means for determining a winning combination by a lottery; means for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination; means for, when the number of games accumulatively counted each time a game is played reaches a set value that is an object of comparison with the number of games and that is selected from plural candidate values determined stepwise in advance, generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and in which a degree of advantage corresponding to the set value is determined; and means for notifying that the second special game state has been generated based on the set value by outputting an image or a sound with the output means when the second special game state is generated.
Description
- This application claims benefit of priority based on PCT/JP2005/015797 filed on Aug. 30, 2005. The contents of this application are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
- 1. Field of the Invention
- The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine in which a game is conducted using a game media (game valuable) such as a coin and the like, a game control method for the gaming machine, and a game system comprising the gaming machine and a control device.
- 2. Discussion of the Background
- Conventionally, in a facility in which gaming machines such as a slot machine are installed, a game is played by inserting various kinds of game media such as a coin, cash and the like into a gaming machine. Each gaming machine pays out a dividend to a player according to a prize wining state (a result of playing the game) generated while the game is in progress.
- In a casino where plural slot machines are installed, a credit spent in each slot machine is partly reserved and in a case where the reservation reaches a predetermined amount, one of the slot machines provides a so-called “jackpot” paying out a big amount, which is not paid out in an ordinary hit (JP-A 2003-117053). In such slot machines, a hit in each machine usually occurs on a preset probability and a player advances a game with expectation of the hit to be encountered. One of the slot machines has a chance to hit a jackpot at a timing in a lottery different from a common lottery in which a hit based on the above-mentioned probability is set in the slot machines. Generally, plural casinos are interconnected in a network in order to increase a payout amount in a jackpot.
- Furthermore, a system has been available in which a host computer and plural gaming machines are interconnected on a network and the generating of a bonus in the gaming machines is controlled by the host computer (U.S. Pat. No. 5,820,459). In this system, not only is the number of coins inserted into each gaming machine added up, but part of a total number of inserted coins in the plural gaming machines are separately added up as a bonus pool. The host computer gives a bonus qualification to a gaming machine in which the number of inserted coins reaches a predetermined number. The host computer transmits a command to one gaming machine selected from gaming machines having bonus qualification, when a value of the bonus pool reaches a predetermined threshold value. The gaming machine which received the command is enabled to play a bonus game high in gambling characteristic.
- In a slot machine described in JP-A 2003-117053, however, it is a player who plays a game in a gaming machine selected in a lottery that enjoys a profit from a jackpot. Hence, there has arisen a case where a player having spent many coins cannot enjoy a jackpot at all, but another player who has just started the game acquires a jackpot profit.
- In the system described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,820,459 as well, a chance to acquire the profit of a bonus game is one of gaming machines in which a total number of inserted coins reaches a predetermined number. A chance to acquire the profit of a bonus game is not always given to a player having spent many coins. Therefore, in the system described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,820,459, there has arisen a case where a player having spent many coins cannot secure the profit of a bonus game and another player who has just started the game acquires a bonus game profit, in a similar way to that in a slot machine described in JP-A 2003-117053.
- In the system described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,820,459, part of the number of inserted coins in each of plural gaming machines is added up as a bonus pool. Hence, in a case where an operation rate of the gaming machines in the system is low, a player, who has spent many of coins, has had a possibility not to be rewarded by the profit of a bonus game since the value of the bonus pool does not reaches a predetermined threshold value. Moreover, since the bonus game in the system described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,820,459 is high in gambling characteristic, there has arisen a case where the profit of the bonus game cannot be acquired sufficiently by a player, even when he is given a chance capable of acquiring the profit.
- If such circumstances occur, a player who has spent many coins may feel unpleasant against the game, build up distrust thereto, or lose interest in or a concern on the game.
- The contents of JP-A 2003-117053 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,820,459 are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
- The present invention has been made in light of the above-mentioned problems and it is an object of the present invention to provide: a gaming machine capable of preventing a player who has spent many of the game media such as coins from feeling unpleasant against a game, building up a distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game; a game control method related to the gaming machine; and a gaming machine system equipped with the gaming machine and a control device.
- In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (1) A gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
- means for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination; and
- means for, when a condition that the number of games accumulatively counted each time a game is played reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established, generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established.
- According to the configuration (1), when a condition that the number of games reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (2) A gaming machine connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
- comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
- means for generating a first special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination;
- means for transmitting an identification information of a gaming machine to the control device through the communication line each time a game is played;
- means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and
- means for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established based on the command signal.
- According to the configuration (2), when a condition that the number of games counted by the control device based reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to the player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (3) A gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
- means for generating a first special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination;
- means for counting accumulatively the number of games each time a game is played;
- means for determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established; and
- means for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is determined to have been established.
- According to the configuration (3), the number of games is accumulatively counted and it is determined whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established. And, when it is determined that said condition is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (4) The gaming machine according to any of the configurations (1) to (3), wherein the means for generating the second special game state payout the number of game media corresponding to the payment balance in terms of the game media which is accumulatively counted until the second special game state is generated, in the second special game state.
- According to the configuration (4), for example, when the payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively counted until the second special game state is generated is “−10000”, 5000 pieces of game media corresponding to 50% of the payment balance in terms of the game media are paid out. Thus, a profit according to the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player can be returned in the second special game state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (5) The gaming machine according to any of the configurations (1) to (3), wherein reception means that can accept for one game an insertion of game media up to a predetermined upper limit value is provided, and the means for generating the second special game state generates the second special game state in a case when the number of inserted game media for the game played by the player is equal to the upper limit when a condition that the number of games reaches the set value is established.
- According to the configuration (5), a player can be urged to insert the game media up to the upper limit, thereby enabling a facility such as a casino to increase its profit.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (6) A gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
- symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery;
- means for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination; and
- means for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines defined by the symbol display means is relatively increased when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively every time a game is played reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established.
- According to the configuration (6), when a condition that the number of games reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line would is a special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- In addition, it is preferable that the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated only when the above condition is established. Because an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (7) A gaming machine connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
- comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
- symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery;
- means for generating a first special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination;
- means for transmitting an identification information of a gaming machine to the control device through the communication line each time a game is played;
- means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and
- means for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines defined by the symbol display means is relatively increased, based on the command signal.
- According to the configuration (7), when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively by the control device reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- (8) A gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
- symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery;
- means for generating a first special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination;
- means for counting accumulatively the number of games each time a game is played;
- means for determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established; and
- means for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines defined by the symbol display means is relatively increased when said condition is determined to have been established.
- According to the configuration (8), the number of games is accumulatively counted and whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established is determined. And when it is determined that said condition is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (9) A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device,
- wherein
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in a case where said condition is established when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively every time a game is played reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established.
- According to the configuration (9), when a condition that the number of games reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (10) A gaming machine equipped with a processing device and a storage device, and connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
- wherein
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing transmitting an identification information of a gaming machine stored in the storage device to the control device through the communication line each time a game is played;
- a processing receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established based on the command signal, and executing the program.
- According to the configuration (10), when a condition that the number of games counted by the control device reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to the player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (11) A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device,
- wherein
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing counting the number of games accumulatively each time a game is played;
- a processing determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established; and
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is determined to have been established, and executing the program.
- According to the configuration (11), the number of games is accumulatively counted and it is determined whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established. And, when it is determined that said condition is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (12) The gaming machine according to any of the configurations (9) to (11), wherein the processing device executes a program for generating the second special game state in which the number of the game media corresponding to the payment balance in terms of the game media counted accumulatively until the generation of second special game state is paid out.
- According to the configuration (12), a profit according to the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player can be returned in the second special game state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (13) The gaming machine according to any of the configurations (9) to (11), wherein the processing device executes a program for generating the second special game state in a case when the number of inserted game media for the game played by the player is equal to the predetermined upper limit of the number of inserted game media for the game played by the player when a condition that the number of game media reaches the set value is established.
- According to the configuration (13), a player can be urged to insert the game media up to the upper limit, thereby enabling a facility such as a casino to increase its profit.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (14) A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device, and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols,
- wherein
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program; and
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of the winning lines is relatively increased when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively every time a game is played reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established.
- According to the configuration (14), when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively every time a game is played reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- (15) A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols, and connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
- wherein
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing transmitting an identification information of the gaming machine stored in the storage device to a control device through the communication line every time a game is played;
- a processing receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased based on the command signal, and executing the program.
- According to the configuration (15), when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively by the control device reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (16) A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device, and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols,
- wherein
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing counting accumulatively the number of games each time a game is played;
- a processing determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established; and
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased when said condition is determined to have been established, and executing the program.
- According to the configuration (16), the number of games is accumulatively counted and whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established is determined. And when it is determined that said condition is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- The present invention provides the following configuration.
- (17) A gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
- means for generating a first special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination; and
- means for generating a second special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when a condition that a payment balance in terms of the game media which is accumulatively counted every time a game is played becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established.
- According to the configuration (17), when a condition that a payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (18) A gaming machine connected through a communication line to a control device which counts a payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines through a communication line, comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
- means for generating a first special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination;
- means for transmitting the payment balance in terms of the game media in a game played by a player together with an identification information of the gaming machine to the control device through the communication line;
- means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media which is counted accumulatively by the control device based on an identification information of the gaming machine and the payment balance in terms of the game media in a game played by a player becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and
- means for read from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established based on the command signal.
- According to the configuration (18), when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media counted accumulatively by the control device becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to the player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (19) A gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
- means for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination;
- means for counting accumulatively the payment balance in terms of the game media each time a game is played;
- means for determining whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media has been established; and
- means for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established in a case where said condition is determined to have been established.
- According to the configuration (19), the payment balance in terms of the game media is accumulatively counted and it is determined whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the-set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media has been established. And, when it is determined that said condition is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (20) The gaming machine according to any of the configurations (17) to (19), wherein the means for generating the second special game state pay out the number of game media corresponding to the number of games counted accumulatively until the generation of second special game state in the second special game state.
- According to the configuration (20), for example, when the number of games accumulatively counted until the second special game state is generated is “600”, 6000 pieces of game media corresponding to ten times the number of the game media are paid out. Thus, a profit according to the number of games played by the player can be returned in the second special game state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (21) The gaming machine according to any of the configurations (17) to (19), comprising reception means that can accept for one game an insertion of game media up to a predetermined upper limit value, wherein the means for generating the second special game state generates the second special game state in a case when the number of inserted game media for the game played by the player is equal to the upper limit when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media is equal to or below the set value is established.
- According to the configuration (21), a player can be urged to insert the game media up to the upper limit, thereby enabling a facility such as a casino to increase its profit.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (22) A gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
- symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery;
- means for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination; and
- means for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines defined by the symbol display means is relatively increased when a condition that the a payment balance in terms of the game media counted accumulatively every time a game is played becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established.
- According to the configuration (22), when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (23) A gaming machine connected through a communication line to a control device which counts a payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines through a communication line, comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
- symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery;
- means for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination;
- means for transmitting the payment balance in terms of the game media in a game played by a player together with an identification information of the gaming machine to the control device through the communication line;
- means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media which is counted accumulatively by the control device based on an identification information of the gaming machine and the payment balance in terms of the game media in a game played by a player becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established; and
- means for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines defined by the symbol display means is relatively increased, based on the command signal.
- According to the configuration (23), when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media counted accumulatively by the control device becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (24) A gaming machine comprising:
- winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
- symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery;
- means for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination;
- means for counting accumulatively the payment balance in terms of the game media each time a game is played;
- means for determining whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media has been established; and
- means for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased when said condition is determined to have been established.
- According to the configuration (24), the payment balance in terms of the game media is accumulatively counted, and whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media has been established is determined. And when it is determined that said condition has been established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (25) A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device,
- wherein
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program; and
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in a case where a condition given below is established, when said condition that a payment balance in terms of the game media which is accumulatively counted every time a game is played becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established, and executing the program.
- According to the configuration (25), when a condition that a payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (26) A gaming machine equipped with a processing device and a storage device, and connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
- wherein
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing transmitting the payment balance in terms of the game media of the game played by the player stored in the storage device together with the identification information of a gaming machine to the control device through the communication line every time a game is played;
- a processing receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game which is counted accumulatively by the control device based on an identification information of the gaming machine and the payment balance in terms of the game media in a game played by a player becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established; and
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established, and executing the program.
- According to the configuration (26), when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media counted accumulatively by the control device becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to the player and is generated only in case of the establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (27) A gaming machine equipped with a processing device and a storage device,
- wherein
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing counting accumulatively the payment balance in terms of the game media each time a game is played;
- a processing determining whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media has been established; and
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in a case where said condition is established, when said condition is determined to have been established, and executing the program.
- According to the configuration (27), the payment balance in terms of the game media is accumulatively counted and it is determined whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media has been established. And, when it is determined that said condition has been established, the second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in case of establishment of said condition is generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the second special game state is generated only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (28) The gaming machine according to any of the configurations (25) to (27), wherein the processing device executes a program for generating the second special game state in which the number of the game media corresponding to the number of games counted accumulatively until the generation of the second special game state is paid out.
- According to the configuration (28), a profit according to the number of games played by the player can be returned in the second special game state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (29) The gaming machine according to any of the configurations (25) to (27), wherein the processing device executes a program for generating the second special game state in a case where the number of inserted game media for the game played by the player is equal to the predetermined upper limit value of the number of game media to be inserted for one game when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value.
- According to the configuration (29), a player can be urged to insert the game media up to the upper limit, thereby enabling a facility such as a casino to increase its profit.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (30) A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device, and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols,
- wherein
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program; and
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased when a condition that the a payment balance in terms of the game media counted accumulatively every time a game is played becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established, and executing the program.
- According to the configuration (30), when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (31) A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols, and connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
- wherein
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing transmitting an identification information of a gaming machine stored in the storage device together with the identification information to the control device through the communication line every time a game is played;
- a processing receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media which is counted accumulatively by the control device based on an identification information of the gaming machine and the payment balance in terms of the game media in a game played by a player becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established; and
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased based on the command signal, and executing the program.
- According to the configuration (31), when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media counted accumulatively by the control device becomes equal to or below a set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (32) A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device, and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols,
- wherein
- the processing device executes:
- a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
- a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program;
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
- a processing counting accumulatively the payment balance in terms of the game media each time a game is played;
- a processing determining whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media has been established; and
- a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased when said condition is determined to have been established, and executing the program.
- According to the configuration (32), the payment balance in terms of the game media is accumulatively counted, and whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value set as an object of comparison with the payment balance in terms of the game media has been established is determined. And when it is determined that said condition is established, the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased is generated. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the first special game state is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, the second special game state is generated as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (33) A gaming machine comprising:
- means for giving a profit to a player based on a result of a lottery; and
- means for giving a profit given only in a case where the following condition is satisfied to the player when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition.
- According to the configuration (33), when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the profit given to the player only when the above condition is satisfied is given. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (34) A gaming machine comprising:
- means for giving a profit to a player according to the combination of symbols stop displayed on winning line based on a result of a lottery; and
- means for increasing the number of the winning lines when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition.
- According to the configuration (34), when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of the winning lines is increased. Thus, the player can play the game in the advantageous state until the number of games satisfies a predetermined condition. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (35) A gaming machine comprising:
- means for giving a profit to a player based on a result of a lottery; and
- means for giving a profit given only in a case where the following condition is satisfied to the player when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition.
- According to the configuration (35), when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the profit given to the player only when the above condition is satisfied is given. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (36) A gaming machine comprising:
- means for giving a profit to a player according to combination of symbols stop displayed on winning line based on a result of a lottery; and
- means for increasing the number of the winning lines when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition.
- According to the configuration (36), when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of winning lines is increased. Thus, the player can play the game in the advantageous state until the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (37) A game control method comprising:
- a step for giving a profit to a player based on a result of a lottery; and
- a step for giving a profit given only in a case where the following condition is satisfied to the player when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition.
- According to the configuration (37), when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the profit given only in a case where above condition is satisfied to the player is given. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (38) A game control method comprising:
- a step for giving a profit to a player according to combination of symbols stop displayed on winning line based on a result of a lottery; and
- a step for increasing the number of the winning lines when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition.
- According to the configuration (38), when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of winning lines is increased. Thus, the player can play the game in the advantageous state until the number of games satisfies the predetermined condition. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (39) A game control method comprising:
- a step for giving a profit to a player based on a result of a lottery; and
- a step for giving a profit given only in a case where the following condition is satisfied to the player when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition.
- According to the configuration (39), when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the profit given only in a case where above condition is satisfied to the player is given. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (40) A game control method comprising:
- a step for giving a profit to a player according to combination of symbols stop displayed on winning line based on a result of a lottery; and
- a step for increasing the number of the winning lines when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition.
- According to the configuration (40), when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of winning lines is increased. Thus, the player can play the game in the advantageous state until the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (41) A game system equipped with a gaming machine and a control device, wherein
- the control device includes:
- means for transmitting a signal to the gaming machine when the number of games played by a player in the gaming machine satisfies a predetermined condition; and
- the gaming machine includes:
- means for giving a profit to the player based on a result of a lottery; and
- means for giving a profit to the player only when the above condition is satisfied based on the signal from the control device.
- According to the configuration (41), when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the profit given to the player only when the above condition is satisfied is given. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (42) A game system equipped with a gaming machine and a control device, wherein the control device includes:
- means for transmitting a signal to the gaming machine when the number of games played by a player in the gaming machine satisfies a predetermined condition,
- and the gaming machine includes:
- means for giving a profit to the player according to the combination of symbols stop displayed on winning line based on the result of a lottery, and means for increasing the number of winning lines based on the signal from the control device.
- According to the configuration (42), when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of winning lines is increased. Thus, the player can play the game in the advantageous state until the number of games satisfies the predetermined condition. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (43) A game system equipped with a gaming machine and a control device, wherein
- the control device includes:
- means for transmitting a signal to the gaming machine when the payment balance in terms of the game media of a player in the gaming machine satisfies a predetermined condition; and
- the gaming machine includes:
- means for giving a profit to the player based on a result of a lottery, and
- means for giving a profit only when the above condition is satisfied.
- According to the configuration (43), when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the profit given to the player only when the above condition is satisfied is given. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- Further, the present invention provides the following configuration.
- (44) A game system equipped with a gaming machine and a control device, wherein
- the control device includes:
- means for transmitting a signal to the gaming machine when the payment balance in terms of the game media of a player in the gaming machine satisfies a predetermined condition;
- and the gaming machine includes:
- means for giving a profit to the player according to the combination of symbols stop displayed on winning line based on a result of a lottery, and means for increasing the number of winning lines-based on the signal from the control device.
- According to the configuration (44), when the payment balance in terms of the game media of the player satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of winning lines is increased. Thus, the player can play the game in the advantageous state until the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game.
- According to the present invention, it can be prevented that the player who used many coins feels frustrated, raises distrust, or loses interest in the game.
-
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the entire construction of a game system according to the first embodiment; -
FIG. 2 is a perspective view schematically showing a gaming machine according to the first embodiment; -
FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing the symbol sequence depicted on the outer circumferential surface of each reel; -
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal construction of the gaming machine shown inFIG. 2 ; -
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the internal construction of a control device according to the first embodiment; -
FIG. 6 is a figure schematically showing an example of correspondence table between a gaming machine identification number and a game history; -
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a procedure in an authentication reading processing for a game program and a game system program executed by a mother board and a gaming board shown inFIG. 4 ; -
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a game mode selection processing; -
FIGS. 9A and 9B are figures showing an image displayed on the lower image display panel when a game mode selection processing is executed; -
FIG. 10 a flowchart showing a subroutine of a game execution processing; -
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a lottery processing; -
FIG. 12 is a figure schematically showing a relation between a plural winning combination, establishment possibility of the winning combination and the number of payout in the first embodiment; -
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a reel rotating control processing; -
FIGS. 14A to 14D are side views for describing a rotating operation of the reel; -
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence table between the number of steps and the code No.; -
FIG. 16 is flowchart showing a subroutine of a bonus game processing; -
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a return mode processing; -
FIG. 18 is a figure showing an example of image displayed on the lower image display panel when a game state shifts to the return mode (when the second special game state is generated); -
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a counting processing; -
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a return mode processing in a second embodiment; -
FIG. 21 is a figure schematically showing a relation between a plural winning combination, establishment possibility of the winning combination and the number of payout in the return mode according to the second embodiment; and -
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing another example of a subroutine of a game execution processing. -
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the entire construction of a game system according to the first embodiment. - A
game system 100 includes:plural gaming machines 10; and acontrol device 200 connected to thegaming machines 10 through apredetermined communication line 101. Such agame system 100 may be constructed in one recreation facility capable of playing various kinds of games such as a bar, a casino and the like, or between plural recreation facilities. When the game system is constructed in one recreation facility, thegame system 100 may be constructed on each floor or section of the recreation facility. Thecommunication line 101 is not particularly limited, and may be wired or wireless, and either a dedicated line or a switched line can be used. - In the first embodiment, the
gaming machine 10 is a slot machine. In the present invention, however, a gaming machine is not limited to a slot machine, and for example, a so-called single gaming machine such as a video slot machine, a video card gaming machine and the like may be adopted, and a so-called mass game (multi-terminal gaming machine) such as a racing game, a bingo game, a public lottery and the like, which is a game that takes a predetermined time for a result to be displayed, may also be adopted. - In the
gaming machine 10, a coin, a note or an electronic valuable information corresponding thereto is used as a game media. In the present invention, however, the game media is not particularly limited, and for example, a medal, a token, an electronic money and a ticket can be used. The ticket is not particularly limited and may include, for example, a ticket with a bar code as described later, and of the like tickets. - The
control device 200 controlsplural gaming machines 10. Especially, in the first embodiment, thecontrol device 200 controls a transition to a return mode in each of thegaming machines 10. The return mode corresponds to the second special game state in the present invention and many coins are paid out in the return mode. Thecontrol device 200 may be a device which controls the return rate by controlling the transition to the return mode. In such a construction, thecontrol device 200 may be a device which controls the return rates of each of thegaming machines 10 individually, or a device which controls the return rate across allgaming machines 10 collectively. - The
control device 200 may further function as a so-called hole server which is installed in a recreation facility havingplural gaming machines 10, or as a server which collectively controls plural recreation facilities. Moreover, everygaming machine 10 has its own identification number, and the source of data transmitted to thecontrol device 200 from each of thegaming machines 10 is distinguished therein by their identification numbers. The identification number is also used to designate a transmission destination of data transmitted to thegaming machine 10 from thecontrol device 200. - The identification number of a gaming machine corresponds to the identification information on a gaming machine of the present invention. The identification information on a gaming machine of the present invention is not particularly limited, and examples thereof may include: a letter, a symbol, a figure, a combination thereof, and the like.
-
FIG. 2 is a perspective view schematically showing a gaming machine according to the first embodiment. - The
gaming machine 10 includes: acabinet 11; atop box 12 placed on the upper side of thecabinet 11; and amain door 13 provided at the front face of thecabinet 11. Inside thecabinet 11, three reels 14 (14L, 14C and 14R) are rotatably installed. Twenty two designs (hereinafter, also referred to as symbols) are depicted as symbol sequences on the outer circumferential surface of each of thereels 14. Reels 14 (14L, 14C and 14R) constitute symbol display device and symbol display means in the present invention. - A lower
image display panel 16 is provided over thereels 14 in themain door 13. The lowerimage display panel 16 is provided with a transparent liquid crystal panel, and various kinds of information, representation image and the like associated with the game are displayed while the game is played. The lowerimage display panel 16 is an output device for an image and functions also as output means capable of outputting an image. - A number-of-
credits display section 31 and a number-of-payouts display section 32 are formed on the lowerimage display panel 16. The number of credited coins is displayed as an image on the number-of-credits display section 31. The number of coins to be paid out is shown as an image on the number-of-payouts display section 32, when a combination of symbols stop displayed on a winning line L is a predetermined combination. - Three display windows 15 (15L, 15C and 15R), the back faces of which are visually recognizable, are formed on the lower
image display panel 16, and through each of thedisplay windows 15, three of the symbols depicted on the outer circumferential surface of each of thereels 14 are displayed. One winning line L traversing horizontally the threedisplay windows 15 is formed on the lowerimage display panel 16. The winning line L defines a combination of symbols. When a combination of symbols stop displayed on the winning line L is a predetermined combination, the number of coins corresponding to the combination and the number of inserted coins (the number of BETs) is paid out.Display windows 15 and lower image display panel (16L, 16C and 16R) constitute symbol display device and symbol display means in the present invention. - Moreover, in the present invention, for example, when: plural winning lines L which traverse horizontally or obliquely the three
display windows 15 are formed; the winning lines L, the number thereof which becomes effective set to be dependent on the number of coin-in, become effective; and a combination of symbols stop displayed on the winning line L which became effective is a predetermined combination, the number of coins corresponding to the stop-displayed combination may be paid out. - A
touch panel 69, which is not shown in the figure, is provided on the front face of the lowerimage display panel 16 and the player can input various kinds of commands by operating thetouch panel 69. - Provided below the lower
image display panel 16 are: acontrol panel 20 constituting ofplural buttons 23 to 27 which are inputted by the player, commands associated with progress of the game; acoin receiving slot 21 accepting coins into thecabinet 11; and anote identifier 22. - The
control panel 20 is provided with: aspin button 23; achange button 24; aCASHOUT button 25; a 1-BET button 26; and amaximum BET button 27. Thespin button 23 is used for inputting a command to start the rotating of thereels 14. Thechange button 24 is used in a case where a player requests an attendant of a recreation facility to exchange money. TheCASHOUT button 25 is used for inputting a command to pay out credited coins to acoin tray 18. - The 1-
BET button 26 is used for inputting a command to bet one coin of the credited coins. Themaximum BET button 27 is used for inputting a command to bet the maximum number of coins that can be bet on one game (50 coins in the first embodiment) of the credited coins. - In the present invention, insertion of a game media means that a game media is bet on a game. For example, when coins inserted into the
coin receiving slot 21 are directly bet on a game, insertion of coins into thecoin receiving slot 21 corresponds to insertion of a game media. However, when coins inserted into thecoin receiving slot 21 are temporarily credited, and the credited coins are bet on a game by operating the 1-BET button 26 or themaximum BET button 27, as in the first embodiment, the bet of the credited coins on the game corresponds to insertion of a game media. - The
note identifier 22 is used not only for discriminating a false note from a true note but also for accepting the true note into thecabinet 11. Thenote identifier 22 may be configured such that aticket 39 with a bar code which will be described later can be read. Abelly glass 34 on which characters and the like of thegaming machine 10 are depicted is provided on the front face of the lower portion of themain door 13, that is, below thecontrol panel 20. - An upper
image display panel 33 is provided at the front face of atop box 12. The upperimage display panel 33 is provided with a liquid crystal panel and, for example, an image to introduce the contents of the game or explain a game rule is displayed thereto. Although the lowerimage display panel 16 is an image output device and functions also as the output means of an image in the present embodiment, in the present invention, the upperimage display panel 33 may also be an image output device, which functions also as the output means of an image. - A
speaker 29 is provided in thetop box 12. Thespeaker 29 is a sound output device and functions as output means capable of outputting a sound. Aticket printer 35, acard reader 36, adata display 37 and akey pad 38 are provided beneath the upperimage display panel 33. Theticket printer 35 prints on a ticket a bar code in which data such as the number of credits, date, time, identification number of thegaming machine 10 and of the like data are encoded, and outputs theticket 39 with a bar code. A player can make theticket 39 with a bar code to be read by a second gaming machine and play a game in the second gaming machine, or exchange in a predetermined place (for example, at a cashier in the casino) of a recreation facility theticket 39 with a bar code to notes. - The
card reader 36 is used for reading data from a smart card and writing data onto a smart card. The smart card is a card to be carried by a player, and for example, data to identify a player and data concerning a history of a game played by a player are stored thereon. Data corresponding to a coin, a note or a credit may also be stored on the smart card. As an alternative of a smart card, a magnetic stripe card may be adopted. The data display 37 is a fluorescent display and the like, and it is used, for example, to display data read by thecard reader 36 and data inputted by a player from thekey pad 38. Thekey pad 38 is used for inputting a command or data to issue a ticket and the like. -
FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing the symbol sequence depicted on the outer circumferential surface of each reel. - Twenty two symbols each are depicted on the outer circumferential surface of the
left reel 14L, themiddle reel 14 C and theright reel 14 R. A sequence of the symbols depicted on the outer circumferential surface of each of thereels 14 is different from one another. The sequences of the symbols are combinations of the following symbols: “JACKPOT 7”, “BLUE 7”, “BELL”, “CHERRY”, “STRAWBERRY”, “PLUM”, “ORANGE” and “APPLE”. - When the same three symbols of one of the symbols of “
JACKPOT 7”, “BLUE 7”, “BELL”, “CHERRY”, “STRAWBERRY”, “PLUM” and “ORANGE” are stop displayed on the winning line L, a predetermined number of credits is added to the account of the player as a credit owned by the player (seeFIG. 12 ). As for “CHERRY” and “ORANGE”, even if one or two of one of the symbols are stop displayed, a predetermined number of credits are added to the account of the player as credits owned by the player according to the number of the symbols stop displayed (seeFIG. 12 ). - The symbol sequence “APPLE” is a bonus game trigger (a symbol to transit to a bonus game). When three of the “APPLE” are stop displayed on the winning line L, a game state shifts to a bonus game. The bonus game corresponds to the first special game state. In the present embodiment, a bonus game is a free game (a game in which a predetermined number thereof can be played without inserting coins for BET).
- In the present invention, the first special game state is not particularly limited as far as it is a game state advantageous to the player. A game state that is advantageous to the player is not particularly limited as far as it is more advantageous than an ordinary game state (a game state other than the first special game state or the second special game state) and examples thereof include: a state where more of the game media can be earned than in an ordinary game state, a state where the game media can be earned on a probability higher than in an ordinary game state, a state where the number of the game media spent by a player is less than in an ordinary game state and of the like state. More specifically, examples of the first special game state include a free game, a second game, a mystery bonus and the like.
- The sequence of symbols depicted on each of the
reels 14 are, when thespin button 23 is pressed after the 1-BET button or themaximum BET button 27 is pressed to start a game, scroll displayed by scrolling downwards in thedisplay windows 15 during the rotating of thereels 14, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rotating of thereels 14 comes to a stop, and thus the sequence of symbols are stop displayed in thedisplay windows 15. Various kinds of winning combinations (seeFIG. 12 ) are predetermined based on combinations of symbols and when a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination stops on the winning line L, the number of payout coins corresponding to the winning combination is added to credits owned by the player. When a bonus game trigger has been established, a bonus game is generated. - When a return mode flag which will be described later has been set to the state “ON”, a game state shifts to a return mode after the symbols are stop displayed as described above. When a bonus game has been generated, the game state shifts to the return mode after the bonus game is over. The return mode corresponds to the second special game state.
- In the first embodiment, if a game state shifts to the return mode, the number of winning lines is increased and five winning lines are adopted. Therefore, in the return mode, a possibility of winning the bonus game trigger or the other winning combination becomes high. In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of coins corresponding to the payment balance in terms of the coins counted accumulatively until the transition to the return mode is paid out or the return mode is continued until the bonus game trigger is won.
-
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal construction of the gaming machine shown inFIG. 2 . - A
gaming board 50 includes: CPU (Central Processing Unit) 51,ROM 55 andboot ROM 52 which are interconnected to one another by an internal bus; acard slot 53S which accepts amemory card 53; anIC socket 54S which accepts GAL (Generic Array Logic) 54. - The
memory card 53 is constituted of non-volatile memories such as CompactFlash (registered trademark) and stores a game program and a game system program. The game program contains a lottery program. The lottery program is a program for determining symbols (code Nos. corresponding to the symbols) on each of thereels 14 which are to be stop displayed on the winning line L. The lottery program contains one or more of symbol weighting determination data, each corresponding to respective plural kinds of payout rates (for example, 80%, 84% and 88%). The symbol weighting determination data is data showing a correspondence relationship between a code No. (seeFIG. 3 ) of each symbol and one or plural random number values from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 255), for each of the threereels 14. A payout rate is determined based on data for setting a payout rate outputted from theGAL 54, and the lottery is executed based on symbol weighting determination data corresponding to the payout rate. In the first embodiment, the lottery is executed based on the same symbol weighting determination data during the transition to the return mode. The present invention is not limited to this example and when a game state shifts to the return mode, the lottery may be executed based on different symbol weighting determination data. - The
card slot 53S is configured so that thememory card 53 can be inserted therein or drawn out therefrom, and connected to amother board 40 through IDE bus. Therefore, a kind or contents of a game played in thegaming machine 10 can be changed by drawing out thememory card 53 from thecard slot 53S, writing a different game program and game system program thereon, and inserting thememory card 53 into thecard slot 53S thereafter. Moreover, a kind or contents of a game played in thegaming machine 10 can also be changed by changing amemory card 53 on which a game program and a game system program are stored to adifferent memory card 53 on which a different game program and game system program are stored. The game program includes a program related to progress in a game; a program for generating the first special game state; and a program for generating the second special game state. The game program further includes: image data and sound data outputted while a game is played and image data and sound data used as notification data. -
GAL 54 is one kind of PLD having an OR fixed array structure.GAL 54 is equipped with a plurality of an input port and an output port and when a predetermined data is inputted to the input port, data corresponding to the input data is outputted from the output port. The data outputted from the output port is the above-mentioned data for setting a payout rate. - The
IC socket 54S is configured such thatGAL 54 can be mounted thereto or demounted therefrom, and connected to themother board 40 through PCI bus. Therefore, data for setting a payout rate outputted fromGAL 54 can be changed by drawing outGAL 54 from theIC socket 54S, rewriting a program stored onGAL 54, mountingGAL 54 is to theIC socket 54S thereafter. Moreover, data for setting a payout rate can also be changed by changingGAL 54 to adifferent GAL 54. -
CPU 51,ROM 55 andboot ROM 52 interconnected to each other by the internal bus are connected to themother board 40 by PCI bus. The PCI bus not only conducts signal transmission between themother board 40 and thegaming board 50, but also supplies electric power to thegaming board 50 from themother board 40.ROM 55 stores country identification information and an authentication program therein.Boot ROM 52 stores a preliminary authentication program, a program forCPU 51 to activate the preliminary authentication program (a boot code) and the like therein. - The authentication program is a program to authenticate a game program and a game system program (an alteration check program). The authentication program is stated along a procedure for confirmation and certification that the game program and the game system program that are objects of an authentication capture processing are not altered, that is, a procedure for conducting authentication of the game program and the game system program (an authentication procedure). The preliminary authentication program is a program for authenticating the above-mentioned authentication program. The preliminary authentication program is stated along a procedure for certification that an authentication program that is an object of an authentication processing is not altered, that is, a procedure for authenticating the authentication program (an authentication procedure).
- The
mother board 40 is constructed with a general-purpose mother board commercially available (a printed circuit board on which basic parts of a personal computer are mounted) and includes: amain CPU 41; ROM (Read Only Memory) 42; RAM (Random Access Memory) 43 and acommunication interface 44. Themain CPU 41 is the processing device of the present invention. -
ROM 42 is constituted of a memory device such as a flash memory and stores thereon a program such as BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) executed by themain CPU 41 and permanent data. When BIOS is executed by themain CPU 41, not only is an initialization processing for predetermined peripheral devices conducted, but a capture processing for the game program and the game system program stored on thememory card 53 is also started via thegaming board 50. In the present invention, contents ofROM 42 may be rewritable or not rewritable. -
RAM 43 stores data and a program used at the time of operation of themain CPU 41.RAM 43 can store the authentication program read through thegaming board 50 together with the game program and the game system program.RAM 43 is the storage device of the present invention. -
RAM 43 is provided with a storage region for a return mode flag. The return mode flag is a flag to be referred to when a game state is to be selected whether it should be shifted to a return mode corresponding to the second special game state or not. The storage region of the return mode flag is constituted of a storage region with, for example, a predetermined number of bits and the return mode flag is turned “ON” or “OFF” according to storage contents in the storage region. If the return mode flag is set to the state “ON”, the game state thereafter shifts to the return mode without fail.RAM 43 further stores data on the number of credits, the number of coin-in or coin-out for one game, and the like. - The
communication interface 44 is used to communicate with thecontrol device 200 through thecommunication line 101. Themain CPU 41 transmits the number of coin-in and the number of coin-out together with the gaming machine identification number of thegaming machine 10 to thecontrol device 200 each time a game is played. The number of games, an accumulative number of coin-in and an accumulative number of coin-out is made to be associated with each gaming machine identification number, and stored in thecontrol device 200. In thecontrol device 200, when the number of games of onegaming machine 10 reaches a set value (“600”, for example), a return command signal is transmitted from thecontrol device 200. When themain CPU 41 receives the return command signal through thecommunication interface 44, the return mode flag is set to the state “ON”. - Both a body PCB (Printed Circuit Board) 60 and a door PCB 80 which will be described later are connected to the
mother board 40 by USB. Apower supply unit 45 is also connected to themother board 40. When electric power is supplied from thepower supply unit 45 to themother board 40, not only is themain CPU 41 of themother board 40 activated, butCPU 51 is also activated from electric power supplied through the PCI bus to thegaming board 50. - Equipment and devices which generate input signals to be inputted to the
main CPU 41, and equipment and devices of which operations are controlled by a control signal outputted from themain CPU 41 are connected to thebody PCB 60 and the door PCB 80. Themain CPU 41 executes a game program and a game system program stored inRAM 43 based of an input signal inputted to themain CPU 41, and thereby performs a predetermined computational processing, stores results of thereof intoRAM 43 and transmits a control signal to each equipment and device as a control processing for each of the equipment and devices. - A
lamp 30, asub CPU 61, ahopper 66, acoin detecting section 67, agraphic board 68, aspeaker 29 as an output device, atouch panel 69, anote identifier 22, aticket printer 35, acard reader 36, akey switch 38S and adata display 37 are connected to thebody PCB 60. Thelamp 30 is lit up in a predetermined pattern based on a control signal outputted from themain CPU 41. - The
sub CPU 61 controls the rotation and stopping of the reels 14 (14L, 14C and 14R). Amotor driving circuit 62 equipped with FPGA (Field Programmable Gate array) 63 and adriver 64 is connected to thesub CPU 61.FPGA 63 is an electronic circuit such as LSI capable of programming and works as a control circuit of a stepping motor 70. Thedriver 64 works as an amplifier circuit of a pulse to be inputted to the stepping motor 70. The stepping motors 70 (70L, 70C and 70R) which rotate each of thereels 14, are connected to themotor driving circuit 62. The stepping motor 70 is a 1-2 phase excitation type stepping motor. Thesub CPU 61, themotor driving circuit 62 and the stepping motor 70 constitute symbol display device and symbol display means. - In the present invention, an exciting type of the stepping motor is not particularly limited, and for example, a motor of a 2 or 1 phase excitation type can be adopted. A DC motor may be adopted instead of a stepping motor. When a DC motor is adopted, a deviation counter, a D/A converter and a servo amplifier are sequentially connected to the
sub CPU 61 in this order and the DC motor is connected to the servo amplifier. A rotational position of the DC motor is detected by a rotary encoder and a current rotational position of the DC motor is supplied as data from the rotary encoder to the deviation counter. - An
index detecting circuit 65 and a positionchange detecting circuit 71 are connected to thesub CPU 61. Theindex detecting circuit 65 is used for detecting positions (indexes described later) of the rotatingreels 14 and can also detect an out-of-order state of thereels 14. As for the control of the rotating and stopping of thereels 14, detailed description will be given later by making reference to the figures. - The position
change detecting circuit 71 detects a change of stoppage positions of thereels 14 after the stopping of the rotating of thereels 14. The positionchange detecting circuit 71 detects the change of stoppage positions of thereels 14, for example, in a case where the stoppage position is changed by force by a player as if the combination of symbols was in a wining state, despite the fact that the combination of symbols is not actually in a wining state, and of the like cases. The positionchange detecting circuit 71 is configured to be capable of detecting the change of stoppage position of thereel 14 by, for example, detecting fins (not shown in the figure) attached with a predetermined space on the inner side of thereel 14. Anindex detecting circuit 65 and a positionchange detecting circuit 71 constitute symbol display device and symbol display means. - The
hopper 66 is installed in thecabinet 11 and pays out a predetermined number of coins from acoin payout exit 19 to acoin tray 18 based on a control signal outputted from themain CPU 41. Acoin detecting section 67 is installed inside thecoin payout exit 19 and when detecting that a predetermined number of coins has been paid out from thecoin payout exit 19, outputs an input signal to themain CPU 41. - The
graphic board 68 controls, based on a control signal outputted from themain CPU 41, image displays on the upperimage display panel 33 and the lowerimage display panel 16. The number of credits stored inRAM 43 is displayed on the number-of-credits display section 31 of the lowerimage display panel 16. The number of coin-out is displayed on the number-of-payouts display section 31 of the lowerimage display panel 16. Moreover, winning line L is displayed on lowerimage display panel 16. - The
graphic board 68 is equipped with VDP (Video Display Processor) which generates image data based on a control signal outputted from themain CPU 41 and a video RAM which temporarily stores image data generated by VDP, and of the like equipments. Note that image data used in generating image data with VDP is read from thememory card 53 and contained in a game program stored inRAM 43. - The
note identifier 22 not only discriminates a true note from a false note, but also accepts the true note into thecabinet 11. Thenote identifier 22, when accepting a true note, outputs an input signal to themain CPU 41 based on a face amount of the note. Themain CPU 41 stores the number of credits corresponding to the amount of the note transmitted with the input signal. - The
ticket printer 35, based on a control signal outputted from themain CPU 41, prints on a ticket a bar code obtained by encoding data such as the number of credits, date and time, the identification number of thegaming machine 10, and of the like data stored inRAM 43, and outputs theticket 39 with a bar code. - The
card reader 36 transmits to themain CPU 41 data read from the smart card and writes data onto the smart card based on a control signal from themain CPU 41. Thekey switch 38S is provided on thekeypad 38, and when thekeypad 38 is operated by a player, outputs a predetermined input signal to themain CPU 41. The data display 37 displays, based on a control signal outputted from themain CPU 41, data read by thecard reader 36 and data inputted by a player through thekey pad 38. - The
control panel 20, areverter 21S, acoin counter 21C and acold cathode tube 81 are connected to the door PCB 80. Thecontrol panel 20 is provided with a spin switch 23 s corresponding to thespin button 23, achange switch 24S corresponding to thechange button 24, aCASHOUT switch 25S corresponding to theCASHOUT button 25, a 1-BET switch 26S corresponding to the 1-BET button 26, and amaximum BET switch 27S corresponding to themaximum BET button 27. When thebuttons 23 to 27 are operated by a player, each of theswitches 23S to 27S corresponding thereto outputs input signals to themain CPU 41. - The
coin counter 21C is installed inside thecoin receiving slot 21, and discriminates whether a coin inserted by a player into thecoin receiving slot 21 is true or false. Coins other than the true ones are discharged from thecoin payout exit 19. Thecoin counter 21C also outputs an input signal to themain CPU 41 when a true coin is detected. - The
reverter 21S operates based on a control signal outputted from themain CPU 41 and distributes coins recognized by thecoin counter 21C as true coins into a cash box (not shown in the figure) or thehopper 66, which are disposed in thegaming machine 10. In other words, when thehopper 66 is filled with coins, true coins are distributed into the cash box. On the other hand, when thehopper 66 is not filled with coins, true coins are distributed into thehopper 66. Thecold cathode tube 81 works as a backlight installed on the back face sides of the lowerimage display panel 16 and the upperimage display panel 33 and is lit up based on a control signal outputted from themain CPU 41. -
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the internal construction of a control device according to first embodiment of the present invention. - A
control device 200 includes:CPU 201 as a processing device;ROM 202;RAM 203 as a temporary storage device; acommunication interface 204; and ahard disc drive 205. Thecommunication interface 204 is connected to thecommunication interface 44 of thegaming machine 10 through thecommunication line 101.ROM 202 stores a system program for controlling operations of the control device, a permanent data, and the like.RAM 203 temporarily stores data received from each of thegaming machines 10 and data such as results of the computational operation. Moreover, a game history of agaming machine 10 is stored in thehard disc drive 205, by being associated with the gaming machine identification number of each of thegaming machines 10. -
FIG. 6 is a figure schematically showing an example of correspondence table between a gaming machine identification number and a game history. - Each of the gaming machine identification numbers correspond to a game history based on the number of games, an accumulative number of coin-in, an accumulative number of coin-out, a payment balance in terms of the coins and a return rate of coin-out.
- When
CPU 201 receives the number of coin-in, the number of coin-out and the gaming machine identification number from thegaming machine 10 through thecommunication interface 204, a game history corresponding to the gaming machine identification number is updated. More specifically, 1 is added to the number of games, the number of coins inserted is added to the accumulative number of coin-in and the number of coins paid out is added to the accumulative number of coin-out. Furthermore, a payment balance in terms of the coins and a return rate are calculated based on the accumulative number of coin-in and the accumulative number of coin-out. WhenCPU 201 determines that the number of games updated has reached a set value,CPU 201 transmits a return command signal to the gaming machine. The return command signal includes the accumulated number of payouts stored inhard disc drive 205 by being associated with identification information of each of thegaming machines 10. - Next, description will be given of a processing performed in the
gaming machine 10. -
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a procedure in an authentication reading processing for a game program and a game system program executed by a mother board and a gaming board shown inFIG. 4 . Note that thememory card 53 is inserted into thecard slot 53S on thegaming board 50 andGAL 54 is mounted to theIC socket 54S. - When a power supply switch is turned on in the
power supply unit 45, themother board 40 and thegaming board 50 are activated (steps S1-1 and S2-1). When themother board 40 and thegaming board 50 are activated, separate processing are performed at the same time. That is, in thegaming board 50,CPU 51 reads a preliminary authentication program stored in theboot ROM 52 and performs the preliminary authentication which in advance, prior to capturing the authentication program into themother board 40, confirms or certificates that the program is not altered according to the read preliminary authentication program (step S2-2). On the other hand, in themother board 40, themain CPU 41 executes BIOS stored inROM 42 to expand onRAM 43 compressed data incorporated in BIOS (step S1-2). Then, themain CPU 41 executes BIOS expanded onRAM 43 to perform diagnosis on and initialization of various kinds of the peripheral devices (step S1-3). - Then, since
ROM 55 on thegaming board 50 is connected to themain CPU 41 through PCI bus, themain CPU 41 not only performs reading of the authentication program stored inROM 55, but also stores the read authentication program into RAM 43 (step S1-4). On this occasion, themain CPU 41 takes a checksum according to ADDSUM method (a standard check function) with the help of the function of a standard BIOS of BIOS, and by performing a confirmation processing for whether or not storage is conducted without error, stores the authentication program intoRAM 43. - Then, after confirming what is connected to the IDE bus, the
main CPU 41 accesses thememory card 53 inserted into thecard slot 53S through the IDE bus, and conducts reading of the game program and the game system program from thememory card 53. In this case, themain CPU 41 reads 4 bites at a time of data constituting the game program and the game system program. Next, themain CPU 41 authenticates by confirming and certifying according to the authentication program stored inRAM 43, that the read game program and game system program has not been altered (step S1-5). When the authentication processing is normally completed, themain CPU 41 writes and stores inRAM 43 the game program and the game system program that have been an object of authentication (have been authenticated) (steps S1 to S6). Then,main CPU 41 accesses through the PCI bus toGAL 54 mounted to theIC socket 54S, reads data for setting a payout rate fromGAL 54 and writes and stores the data in RAM 43 (step S1-7). Then, themain CPU 41 not only reads through the PCI bus country identification information stored inROM 55 on thegaming board 50, but also stores the read country identification information into RAM 43 (step S1-8). - After the processing is over, the
main CPU 41 sequentially reads and executes the game program and the game system program to such that a game is progressed. - After the processing shown in
FIG. 7 is over, themain CPU 41 performs a game mode selection processing. -
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a game mode selection processing. - The
main CPU 41 conducts a processing for adding credits stored inRAM 43 as an interrupt processing when it receives a detection signal outputted from thecoin counter 21C in a case where thecoin counter 21C detects a coin inserted into thecoin receiving slot 21 while executing the subroutine. -
FIGS. 9A and 9B are figures showing an image displayed on the lower image display panel when a game mode selection processing is executed. - To begin with, the
main CPU 41 conducts a processing to display on the lowerimage display panel 16 an image for requesting to the player selection of a game mode (step S3). In this processing, themain CPU 41 transmits a depiction command for the game mode selection image to thegraphic board 68. On the graphic board, VDP extracts image data fromRAM 43 and expands the data on the video RAM to produce image data for one frame and to output the image data to the lowerimage display panel 16, based on the depiction command. As a result, for example, an image as shown inFIG. 9A is displayed on the lowerside display panel 16. -
FIG. 9A is a figure showing an example of game mode selection image displayed on the lower image display panel. In the figure, numerical reference 15 (15L, 15C and 15R) indicates display windows. L indicates a winning line. An image showing “Select a mode!!” is displayed in the upper portion of the lowerimage display panel 16. The image is an image for requesting a player to select a game mode. Moreover, images showing “INSURANCE” and “NO INSURANCE” are displayed in the lower portion of the lowerimage display panel 16. The images are images indicating game mode options and the player touches a predetermined site of thetouch panel 69 corresponding to a display region of the image, and is thereby enabled to input a command for selecting a game mode. - The option “INSURANCE” corresponds to the with-insurance mode. A predetermined number of credits (for example, number of credits equivalent to 1 dollar) is required for selecting the with-insurance mode. As an alternative of the number of credits, a note or a coin equivalent to the number of credits may be directly inserted. In a case where the with-insurance mode has been selected, when the number of games reaches a set value (for example, 600) without a bonus game being generated, the return mode flag is set to the state “ON” and a game state shifts to the return mode. In the return mode, since the number of the winning lines is increased, establishment possibility of the winning combination becomes high. Therefore, in the return mode, the player can receive payout of more coins. In other words, in the with-insurance mode, a game can be played in a state where an insurance is carried for compensating all or part of a loss arising in a case where no bonus game has arisen for a long time. On the other hand, an option “NO INSURANCE” corresponds to the without-insurance mode. In a case where the without-insurance mode has been selected, the return mode flag is not set to the state of “ON” and a game state does not shift to the payout return mode even if no bonus game has arisen for a long time after the without-insurance mode is selected.
- After the processing in step S3, the
main CPU 41 determines whether the with-insurance mode has been selected or not (step S4). In a case where it is determined that the with-insurance mode has been selected, the main CPU conducts a processing for subtracting a predetermined number of credit from the number of credits stored in RAM 43 (step S5). Thereafter, the game execution processing in the with-insurance mode is conducted (step S6). - While detailed description of the above-mentioned processing will be given later by making reference to
FIG. 10 , when played in the with-insurance mode, an image showing “INSURED” is displayed in the upper left of the lowerimage display panel 16, as shown inFIG. 9B . The image is an image showing that a game mode is in the with-insurance mode. - On the other hand, in the case where, in step S4, it is determined that the without-insurance mode has been selected, the
main CPU 41 conducts the game execution processing in the without-insurance mode (step S7). Since this processing is a processing almost the same as the game execution processing in the with-insurance mode (seeFIG. 10 ) except that neither a processing related to transition to the return mode nor a processing related to counting of the number of games is conducted, description thereof is omitted here. When the processing in step S6 or S7 has been executed, the process is returned to step S3 thereafter. -
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a game execution processing in the with-insurance mode that is called and executed in step S6 of the subroutine shown inFIG. 8 . - In the game execution processing, the
main CPU 41 at first determines whether or not a coin is BET (step S10). In the processing, themain CPU 41 determines whether an input signal outputted from the 1-BET switch 26S or themaximum BET switch 27S has been received or not when the 1-BET button 26 or themaximum BET button 27 is operated, respectively. If it is determined that a coin has not been BET, the process returns to step S10. - On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10 that a coin is BET, the
main CPU 41 conducts a processing for subtracting the number of credits stored inRAM 43 according to the number of BET coins (step S11). In a case where the number of BET coins is more than the number of credits stored inRAM 43, the process returns to step S10 without conducting subtraction on the number of credits stored inRAM 43. In a case where the number of BET coins exceeds the upper limit (50 coins in the first embodiment) up to which a BET is possible in one game, the process advances to step S12 without conducting a processing for subtracting the number of BET coins from the number of credits stored inRAM 43. - Then, the
main CPU 41 determines whether thespin button 23 has been turned ON or not (step S12). In the processing, the main CPU 41 d determines, when thespin button 23 is pressed, whether an input signal outputted from thespin switch 23S has been received or not. - If it is determined that the
spin button 23 has not been turned ON, the process returns to step S10. Note that in a case where the spin button has not been turned ON (for example, in a case where a command of terminating a game has been inputted without turning ON the spin button), themain CPU 41 cancels a result of the subtracting processing in step S11. - In the first embodiment, description will be given of a case in which: after a coin is BET (step S10), a processing for conducting subtraction on the number of credits (step S11) is conducted prior to the determination on whether the spin button has been turned ON or not (step S12). However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a processing for subtraction on the number of credits (step S11) may be conducted after a coin is BET (step S10), determined whether the
spin button 23 has been turned ON or not (step S12), and when determined that thespin button 23 has been turned ON (YES in step S12). - On the other hand, in step S12 of
FIG. 10 , if it is determined that thespin button 23 has been turned ON therein, themain CPU 41 conducts a lottery processing (step S13). In the lottery processing, the main CPU 41 (processing device) executes a lottery program stored in RAM 43 (storage device) to thereby determine a code No. of the stoppedreels 14. Thus, a combination of symbols stop displayed is determined. Detailed description of the processing will be given later by making reference toFIGS. 11 and 12 . When the processing in step S13 is executed, themain CPU 41 works as winning combination determination means for determining a winning combination by a lottery. In the first embodiment, description will be given of a case where a combination of symbols stop displayed is determined, and one winning combination of plural winning combinations is determined thereafter. However, in the present invention, one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations may at first be determined by a lottery, and the combination of symbols to be stop displayed may be determined thereafter, based on the determined winning combination. - Then, the
main CPU 41 conducts a reel rotating control processing (step S14). The processing is a processing which, after all of thereels 14 starts to rotate, stops the rotating of each of thereels 14 such that a combination of symbol sequences corresponding to the winning combination determined in step S13 is stop displayed on the winning line L. Detailed description of the processing will be given later by making reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. - Then, the
main CPU 41 determines whether a bonus game trigger has been established or not, that is whether “APPLE” is stop displayed in thedisplay window 15 or hot (step S15). If it is determined that the bonus game trigger has been established, the main CPU 41 (processing device) reads a program for conducting a bonus game from RAM 43 (storage device) to execute a bonus game processing (step S16). Here, the first special game state is generated. Detailed description of the bonus game processing will be given later by making reference toFIG. 16 . When the processing in step S16 is executed, themain CPU 41 functions as means for generating the first special game state. - On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus game trigger has not been established, the
main CPU 41 determines whether a winning combination has been established or not (step S17). If it is determined that a winning combination has been established, themain CPU 41 conducts payout of a coin corresponding to the number of coin-in and the winning combination (step S18). - In a case where coins are reserved, the
main CPU 41 conducts a processing to add the coins to the number of credits stored inRAM 43. On the other hand, in a case where payout of a coin is conducted, themain CPU 41 transmits a control signal to thehopper 66 and conducts payout of a predetermined number of coins. In that situation, thecoin detecting section 67 counts the number of coins paid out from thehopper 66 and when the number of counts reaches a designated number, transmits a payout completion signal to themain CPU 41. Thus, themain CPU 41 stops the driving of thehopper 66 to terminate the coin payout processing. - When the processing in step S16 or S18 is executed, or when it is determined that no winning combination has been established (that a winning combination has failed to be established) in step S17, the
main CPU 41 determines whether the return mode flag stored inRAM 43 is set to the state “ON” (step S19) or not. If it is determined that the return mode flag has been set to the state “ON”, the main CPU 41 (processing device) reads from RAM 43 (storage device) a program for shifting a game state to the return mode, executes the return mode processing, to thus shift a game state to the return mode (step S20). Here, the second special game state has been generated. Detailed description will be given of the payout return mode processing later usingFIG. 17 . Themain CPU 41, when executing the processing in step S20, functions as means for generating the second special game state. - If the processing in step S20 has been executed, or if it is determined that the return mode flag has not been set to the state “ON” in step S19, the
main CPU 41 determines whether the bonus game (step S16) has been executed or not or whether a game state has shifted to the return mode (step S20) or not (step S21). - If it is determined that a bonus game has not been executed, or that a game state has not shifted to the payout return mode, the
main CPU 41 executes a counting processing (step S22). - The counting processing is a processing conducted between the
gaming machine 10 and thecontrol device 200. The number of coin-in and the number of coin-out for one game together with the gaming machine identification number are transmitted to thecontrol device 200. In thecontrol device 200, the number of games, an accumulative number of coin-in, an accumulative number of coin-out and the like are updated with respect to each gaming machine identification number. When the number of games reaches a set value, a return command signal is transmitted to thegaming machine 10. The return command signal includes the accumulated number of payouts as data stored inhard disc drive 205 by being associated with identification information of each of thegaming machines 10. Themain CPU 41, when receiving the return command signal, sets the return mode flag to the state “ON” and stores the accumulated number of payouts as data. - Detailed description of the counting processing will be given later by making reference to
FIG. 19 . After the processing in step S22 is executed, themain CPU 41 returns the process to the processing in step S10 and subsequently executes a game in the with-insurance mode. - On the other hand, when it is determined that a bonus game has been executed or a game state has shifted to the payout return mode, the present subroutine is completed and the process returns to the processing shown in
FIG. 8 . As a result, a player can once again select whether a game is to be played by the with-insurance mode or the without-insurance mode. -
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a lottery processing called and executed in step S13 of the subroutine shown inFIG. 10 . The processing is a processing conducted by executing a lottery program stored inRAM 43 with themain CPU 41. Themain CPU 41 executes a random number generating program included in the lottery program, and a random number value from the numerical value range of 0 to 255 is selected thereby such that each of the selected random number values correspond to each of the three reels 14 (step S31). In the first embodiment, description will be given of a case where random numbers are generated on a program (a case where so-called software random numbers are used). In the present invention, however, a random number generator may be used, and random numbers may be extracted therefrom (so-called hardware random numbers may be used). - After the random number values are selected, the main CPU 41 (processing device) refers to symbol weighting determination data corresponding to payout rate setting data which is outputted from
GAL 54 and stored inRAM 43, and determines, based on the selected three random number values, code Nos. (seeFIG. 3 ) for each of the reels 14 (step S32). The code Nos. of thereels 14 correspond to code Nos. of the symbols stop displayed on the winning line L. Themain CPU 41 determines code Nos. of thereels 14 to thereby determine a winning combination. For example, in a case where code Nos. of thereels 14 are determined “00”, “00” and “00”, it means that themain CPU 41 determined a winning combination as “JACKPOT”. Based on the code Nos. determined for each of the reels, a reel rotating control processing which will be described later is conducted. On this occasion, themain CPU 41 functions as winning combination determination means. - Here, description of a winning combination in the first embodiment will be given.
-
FIG. 12 is a figure describing a relationship among winning combinations of plural kinds, establishment possibility of each winning combination and the number of coin-out in the first embodiment. The establishment possibilities of each of the winning combinations shown inFIG. 12 are of a case where a payout rate is set to 88% in a game other than a bonus game. The establishment possibilities shown in the figure show possibilities of the establishment of each of the shown winning combinations in such a case that code Nos. of each of thereels 14 are determined based on the selected three random number values by referring to a symbol weighting determination data. In other words, the random number values are not made to correspond to each of the winning combinations. - An establishment possibility of a bonus game trigger is 0.5%. If a player hits the bonus game trigger, three “APPLE” symbols are stop displayed on the winning line L and a bonus game is generated. In the bonus game, executed is a free game of which the number of games is determined by a lottery.
- An establishment possibility of “
JACKPOT 7” is 0.5%. If the winning combination has been established, three “JACKPOT 7” symbols are stop displayed on the winning line L, and 30 coins per one coin-in are paid out. The lower the establishment possibility of the winning combination is, the higher the number of coin-out is set. When a combination of symbols stop displayed is not hitting any of the winning combinations shown inFIG. 12 , this is a failure, and there is no coin-out. -
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel rotating control processing called and executed in step S15 of the subroutine shown inFIG. 10 . This processing is a processing conducted between themain CPU 41 and thesub CPU 61. - The
main CPU 41 transmits to the sub CPU 61 a start signal that starts the rotating of reels (step S40). Thesub CPU 61 conducts a reel rotating processing when it receives the start signal from the main CPU 41 (step S51). In the processing, thesub CPU 61 supplies a pulse to themotor driving circuit 62. The pulse outputted from thesub CPU 61 is amplified by thedriver 64 and supplied to each of the stepping motors 70 (70L, 70C and 7OR). As a result, the stepping motors 70 rotate, thereby making the reels 14 (14L, 14C and 14R) to rotate. A stepping motor 70 is a 1-2 phase excitation type stepping motor which has a step angle of 0.9 degree and requires the number of steps of 400 for one rotation. Hence, if 400 pulses are supplied to the stepping motor 70, thereels 14 rotate once. - When the
reels 14 start to rotate, thesub CPU 61 supplies to themotor driving circuit 62 pulses at a lower frequency, and the pulse frequency is gradually raised. A rotational speed of thereels 14 is thereby increased. When a predetermined time elapses, the pulse frequency is controlled to be constant. As a result, thereels 14 rotate at a constant speed. - Here, description of a rotational operation of the
reels 14 will be given, by usingFIG. 14 . -
FIGS. 14A to 14D are side views for describing a rotating operation of areel 14. - As shown in
FIG. 14A , asemicircular metal plate 14a is attached to the side surface of areel 14. Themetal plate 14 a rotates together with thereel 14. Twenty two symbols (seeFIG. 3 ) are depicted on the circumferential surface of thereel 14. Three symbols of the twenty two symbols depicted on the circumferential surface of thereel 14 can be visually recognizable through thedisplay window 15 formed in front of thereel 14. The arrow mark of a heavy line in the figure indicates a rotating direction of thereel 14. Aproximity sensor 65 a is provided on the side of thereel 14. Theproximity sensor 65 a is used to detect themetal plate 14 a. Theproximity sensor 65 a does not rotate nor move even if thereel 14 rotates. -
FIG. 14A shows a position of themeal plate 14 a when themetal plate 14 a starts being detected by theproximity sensor 65 a (hereinafter also referred to as a position A). If thereel 14 rotates when themetal plate 14 a is at the position A, themetal plate 14 a moves to a position shown inFIG. 14B .FIG. 14B shows a position of themetal plate 14 a when themetal plate 14 a is being detected by theproximity sensor 65 a (hereinafter also referred to as a position B). If thereel 14 rotates when themetal plate 14 a is at the position B, themetal plate 14 a moves to a position shown inFIG. 14C .FIG. 14C shows a position of themetal plate 14 a when themetal plate 14 a will no longer be detected by theproximity sensor 65 a (hereinafter also referred to as a position C). - If the
reel 14 rotates when themetal plate 14 a is at the position C, themetal plate 14 a moves to a position shown inFIG. 14D .FIG. 14D shows a position of themetal plate 14 a when themetal plate 14 a is not detected by theproximity sensor 65 a (hereinafter also referred to as a position D). If thereel 14 further rotates, a position of themetal plate 14 a returns to the position A. As described above, together with the rotating of thereel 14, themetal plate 14 a changes its position in the order from the position A, to the position B, to the position C, to the position D, to the position A and so forth. - The
proximity sensor 65 a constitutes an index detecting circuit 65 (seeFIG. 3 ). When it is referred to as “High” at a state where theproximity sensor 65 a detects themetal plate 14a, and as “Low” at a state where theproximity sensor 65 a does not detect themetal plate 14 a, a state of theindex detecting circuit 65 is “High” during the period when themetal plate 14 a moves from the position A to the position B and to the position C, and a state of theindex detecting circuit 65 is “Low” during the period when themetal plate 14 a moves from the position C to the position D and to the position A. Thesub CPU 61 assigns a rise from “Low” to “High” as an index (origin) 1 and a fall from “High” to “Low” as an index (origin) 2 to thereby recognize the rotating position of thereel 14. - The
main CPU 40, after transmitting in step 40 a start signal to thesub CPU 61, executes representation to be executed while the reels are rotating (step S41). The process is a processing which conducts display of an image on the lowerimage display panel 16 and output of a sound from thespeaker 29 over a period (for example, 3 seconds) determined according to a result and the like of the lottery processing (step S13 inFIG. 10 ). - Then, the
main CPU 40 determines whether it is the timing at which a command is to be issued so as to stop the rotating of thereel 14, or not (step S42). - The timing at which a command is issued so as to stop rotation of a
reel 14 is a timing before the time when the representation to be executed while the reels are rotating is terminated, which is an interval having the minimum time necessary for stopping the rotating of thereel 14. Note that the minimum time necessary for stopping the rotating of thereel 14 is determined in advance. - If it is determined in step S42 that it is not the timing at which the command to stop the rotating of the
reel 14 is to be issued, the process returns to the processing in step S42 and there presentation to be executed while the reels are rotating continues to be conducted. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42 that it is the timing at which the command to stop the rotating of thereel 14 is to be issued, themain CPU 41 transmits to the sub CPU 61 a code No. of the reel which is stored in RAM 43 (step S43). When thesub CPU 61 receives a code No. of the reel from themain CPU 41, the code No. is converted to a stopping position of the reel (the number of steps) from an index, based on a correspondence table between the number or steps and the code Nos. stored in ROM (not shown in the figure) included in the sub CPU 61 (step S52). -
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence table between the number of steps and the code No. Each of the code Nos. are related to an index and the number of steps. - Each code No. corresponds to the symbols depicted on the circumferential surfaces of the reels 14 (see
FIG. 3 ) and symbols of code Nos. “00” to “10” correspond to theindex 1. Moreover, symbols of code Nos. “11” to “21” correspond to theindex 2. The number of steps in the correspondence table shown inFIG. 15 is the number of steps with theindex 1 as a reference. For example, if a code No. is “08”, a stopping position of the reel is at 145 steps from theindex 1. If a code No. is “12”, a stopping position of the reel is at 218 steps from theindex 1. - Then, the
sub CPU 61 executes a reel stopping processing (step S53). In the processing, thesub CPU 61 detects a rise in theindex detecting circuit 65 from “Low” to “High” (the index 1) on each of thereels 14, and supplies to themotor driving circuit 65 pulses corresponding to the number of steps which were converted in step S52 from a code No. at a timing at which theindex 1 is detected, and supply of pulses is ceased thereafter. - For example, when, in step S52, the stopping positions of the reels are determined to be 145 steps from the
index 1, thesub CPU 61supplies 145 pulses to themotor driving circuit 65 at a timing at which theindex 1 is detected, and the supply of pulses is terminated thereafter. Furthermore, when, in step S52, the stopping positions of the reels are determined to be 218 steps from theindex 1, thesub CPU 61supplies 218 pulses to themotor driving circuit 65 at a timing at which theindex 1 is detected. As a result, thereels 14 stop at the code No. determined instep 32 ofFIG. 11 and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination determined in step S32 ofFIG. 11 is stop displayed on the winning line L. On the other hand, themain CPU 41 terminates the representation to be executed while the reels are rotating. After the processing in steps S44 and S53 are over, the present reel rotating control processing is completed. - Moreover, when an index corresponding to the code No. transmitted in step S43 is different from an index detected by the
index detecting circuit 65 when the rotating of thereels 14 stop, this means that an out-of-order state occurred on thereels 14; therefore, themain CPU 41 conducts a processing for displaying an error message on the lowerimage display panel 16 to temporarily stop a game. - For example, in a case where, even though a processing for stopping the
reel 14L was executed at the code No. 12 corresponding to theindex 2, theindex 1 is detected by theindex detecting circuit 65 when the rotating of thereel 14L stops, the game is temporarily stopped. -
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a bonus game processing called and executed in step S16 of the subroutine shown inFIG. 10 . In the bonus game processing, firstly, themain CPU 41 determines a number T of bonus games from 10 to 25 games, based on a random number value obtained by executing a random number generation program included in a lottery program stored in RAM 43 (step S60). Themain CPU 41 stores as data intoRAM 43 the number of games of the determined bonus games. - Next, the
main CPU 41 conducts a lottery processing (step S61) and a reel rotating control processing (step S63). The processing in step S61 is a processing almost the same as the processing described usingFIG. 11 . The processing in step S63 is a processing almost the same as the processing described usingFIG. 13 . Since descriptions of these processing have already been given, descriptions thereof are omitted herein. - Then, the
main CPU 41 determines whether a bonus game trigger has been established or not, that is, whether three “APPLE” are stop displayed in thedisplay windows 15 or not (step S64). If it is determined that the bonus game trigger has been established, the number t of additional games of the bonus game is determined in a lottery (step S65) and the determined number t of additional games is added to the number T of games of the bonus game (step S66). Thus, when a bonus game is hit during the bonus game, a remaining number of bonus games increases. More specifically, for example, in a case where a game state shifts to 20 bonus games for the first time, and hits 17 bonus games upon conducting 12 of the bonus games, another 25 bonus games (20 bonus games−12 bonus games+17 bonus games) are to be conducted. - If a bonus game trigger has not been established, the
main CPU 41 determines whether a winning combination has been established or not (step S67). If it is determined that the winning combination has been established, themain CPU 41 conducts payout of coins corresponding to the number of coin-in and the winning combination (step S68). Since the processing is similar to the processing in step S18 and description thereof has already been given, the description of the present processing is omitted herein. - In a case where the processing in step S66 or S68 has been executed, or if it is determined in step S67 that any winning combination has not been established (if it is determined that a failure has occurred), the
main CPU 41 reads the number T of bonus games stored inRAM 43, and one bonus game is subtracted from the read number T of bonus games. The number T of bonus games after the subtraction is again stored into RAM 43 (step S69). - Then, the
main CPU 41 determines whether the number T of bonus games reaches the number of games determined in step S60 or not (step S70). More specifically, it is determined whether the number T of games stored inRAM 43 has become 0 or not, and if the number T of games is not 0, that is, if it is determined that the number of bonus games played does not reach the number of games which were determined in step S60, the process returns to step S61 and the above-mentioned processing is repeated. On the other hand, if the number T of games is 0, that is, if it is determined that the number T of games has reached the number of games which were determined in step S60, a number-of-games reset signal is transmitted to the control device 200 (step S71), and the present subroutine is completed thereafter. The number-of-games reset signal includes the gaming machine identification information of thegaming machine 10, andCPU 201 of thecontrol device 200, when receiving the number-of-games reset signal, resets to 0 the number of games of which is stored in thehard disc drive 205 by being made to correspond to the gaming machine identification information included in the number-of-games reset signal. -
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a return mode processing called and executed in step S20 of the subroutine shown inFIG. 10 . - First, the
main CPU 41 determines the number P of total payout in the return mode according to the payment balance in terms of coins transmitted from thecontrol device 200 as the return command signal and stored in RAM 43 (step S120). In the first embodiment, the number corresponding to 50% of the payment balance in terms of coins is set as the number P of total payout in the return mode. For example, when the payment balance in terms of coins is “−10000”, the number P of total payout in the return mode is set as 5000. However, when the number P of total payout determined according to the payment balance in terms of coins does not reach a predetermined lower limit value (“3000”, for example), a predetermined number is set as the number P of total payout. - Next, the
main CPU 41 extracts the image data showing the winning line from the image data stored inRAM 43, and displays five winning lines on the lowerimage display panel 16 based on the image data (step S121). The image data showing the winning lines is contained in the game program read from thememory card 53 and stored inRAM 43. - The
main CPU 41 determines the image to be displayed on the lowerimage display panel 16. Then, themain CPU 41 transmits to the graphic board 68 a depiction command based on the result determined. In thegraphic mode 68, VDP extracts fromRAM 43 image data showing five winning lines, expands the data on the video RAM, produces image data for one frame and outputs the image data to the lowerimage display panel 16. As a result, for example, images as shown in FIGS. 18 are displayed on the lowerimage display panel 16. - FIGS. 18 is a figure showing an example of image displayed on the lower image display panel when a game state shifts to the return mode (when the second special game state is generated). Numerical reference 15 (15L, 15C and 15R) in the figures indicates display windows. L indicates a winning lines displayed before the game state shifts to the return mode.
- On the lower
image display panel 16, an image showing other than the winning line L, two winning lines L′ crossing the threedisplay windows 15 horizontally and two winning lines L′ crossing the threedisplay windows 15 obliquely. - On the lower
image display panel 16, an image showing “BONUS !!”, together with two images showing fireworks are displayed. An image showing “TIME OFPLAY 600” is also displayed in the lower portion of the lowerimage display panel 16. This image is an image showing that the number of games reached 600). - Next, the
main CPU 41 determines whether or not a coins is BET (step S122). When it is determined that the coins is not BET, the process returns to step S122. On the other hand, when it is determined that the coins is BET, themain CPU 41 executes processing for subtracting the number of credit (step S123), Then, themain CPU 41 determins whether thespin button 23 is turned ON or not (S124). When it is determined that thespin button 23 is not turned ON, the process returns to step S140. On the other hand, when it is determined that thespin button 23 is turned ON, the process advances to step S125. In addition, the processes in steps S122 to S124 are the same processes as those in steps S10 to S12 of the subroutine shown inFIG. 18 . - In step S125, the
main CPU 41 executes the random number generation program contained in the lottery program to select a random number value corresponding to each of the threereels 14 from the numerical value range of 0 to 255 (step S125). Then, themain CPU 41 refers to the data for setting a payout rate outputted from theGAL 54 and stored inRAM 43 and determines the code NO. (seeFIG. 3 ) of eachreel 14 based on the selected three random number values (step S126). - Next, the
main CPU 41 executes reel rotating control processing (S127). Since this process is the same as that of step S14 (see FIGS. 13 to 15) of the subroutine shown inFIG. 10 , its description will be omitted here. - Next, the
main CPU 41 determines whether or not the winning combination is established on any one of the five winning lines (step S128). When it is determined that the winning combination is not established on any one of the five winning lines, the process returns to step S122. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning combination is established on any one of the five winning lines, themain CPU 41 executes coin-out of number Q corresponding to established winning combination (step S129). The number Q is provided by multiplying a predetermined number of payout for the established winning combination and the number of the inserted coins. In addition, when the plural winning combinations are established, the number Q is provided by multiplying the determined number of payout to all of the established winning combinations and the number of the inserted coins. - Then, the main CPU updates the accumulated number R of payout in the return mode (step S130). The accumulated number R of payout in the return mode is stored in
RAM 43 as data and themain CPU 41 reads out the accumulated number R of payout stored inRAM 43 in step S130 and adds the number Q to the number R and stores the given number R inRAM 43. - Next, the
main CPU 41 determines whether or not the bonus game trigger is established on any one of the five winning lines (step S131). When it is determined that the bonus game trigger is not established on any one of the five winning lines, themain CPU 41 determines whether or not the accumulated number R of payout is equal to or more than the number P of total payout (step S132). When it is determined that the accumulated number R of payout is not equal to or more than the number P of total payout, the process returns to step S122. On the other hand, when it is determined that the accumulated number R of payout is equal to or more than the number P of total payout, themain CPU 41 sets the return mode flag to “OFF” (step S134) and terminates this subroutine. - On the other hand, when it is determined that the bonus game trigger is established on any one of the five winning lines in step S131, the bonus game processing (see
FIG. 16 ) is executed (step S133). Then themain CPU 41 sets the return mode flag to “OFF” (step S134), and terminates this subroutine. In addition, when the processing inFIG. 17 is completed, the number of winning lines becomes one again and the normal game is continued to be played. -
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a counting processing called and executed in step S22 of the subroutine shown inFIG. 10 . - The processing is a processing conducted between the
main CPU 41 of agaming machine 10 andCPU 201 of thecontrol device 200. - To begin with, the
main CPU 41 transmits by thecommunication interface 44 the number of coin-in and the number of coin-out stored inRAM 43 together with the gaming machine identification number to thecontrol device 200 through the communication line 101 (step S90). The number of coin-in and the number of coin-out transmitted to thecontrol device 200 from thegaming machine 10 are those of the game concerned. - The processing in step S90 is a processing in which the main CPU 41 (processing device) transmits the identification information of the
gaming machine 10 stored in the main RAM 43 (storage device) to thecontrol device 200 through thecommunication line 101, each time a game is played. When the processing in step S90 is executed, themain CPU 41 functions as means for transmitting the identification information of thegaming machine 10 to thecontrol device 200 through thecommunication line 101. - On the other hand, the
CPU 201 of thecontrol device 200, when receiving from thegaming machine 10 the number of coin-in, the number of coin-out and the gaming machine identification number through thecommunication line 101 by thecommunication interface 204, updates the number of games, the accumulative number of coin-in and the accumulative number of coin-out corresponding to the received gaming machine identification number (step S100), by choosing the data, which are made to correspond to each of the gaming machine identification numbers, of the number of games, the accumulative number of coin-in, the accumulative number of coin-out stored in the hard disc drive 205 (seeFIG. 6 ). - Then,
CPU 201 determined whether the number of games after the updating has reached the set value or not (step S101). If it is determined that the number of games after the updating has not reached the set value, the subroutine is terminated. - On the other hand, if it is determined in step S101 that the number of games after the updating has reached the set value, the
CPU 201 transmits a return command signal showing the payment balance in terms of coins (step S103). Then, theCPU 201 resets to 0 the number of games stored inhard disc drive 205 by being associated with identification information of each of the gaming machines 10 (step S104). - When the
main CPU 41 of thegaming machine 10 receives the return command signal transmitted from thecontrol device 200 in step S103, it sets the return mode flag to “ON” (step S91). The processing in step S91 is a processing for receiving the return command signal transmitted from thecontrol device 200 when the number of games accumulatively counted by thecontrol device 200 based on the identification information of thegaming machine 10 reaches the set value. Thus, themain CPU 41 functions as means for receiving the command signal transmitted from thecontrol device 200 in step S91. Then, themain CPU 41 stores the data showing the payment balance in terms of coins contained in the return command signal in RAM 43 (step S92). Thereafter, the present processing is terminated. - In the present embodiment, description has been given of a case where a game state shifts to the return mode when the number of games reaches a set value (see
FIG. 19 ). The present invention is, however, not limited to this example. For example, in a case where the number of inserted game media for a game played by the player is at the upper limit value that can be accepted in one game when the number of games reaches the set value, the second special game state may be generated (the game state shifts to the return mode). This is because in such a case, a player can be urged to insert game media up to the upper limit and a facility such as a casino and the like can increase a profit. - Moreover, in a case where the second special game state is generated when the number of inserted game media is at the upper limit value, the second special game state may be generated not when the number of games reaches the set value, but when the number of inserted game media is at the upper limit value for a game played by a player when the number of games in which insertion of game media is conducted to the upper limit value reaches a set value. This is because, in such a case, it can be prevented from a small number of game media to be inserted in a game, thereby leading to a fact that the second special game state is generated by the spending of only a small number of game media in total.
- As described above, a gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment including: the main CPU 41 (processing device); RAM 43 (storage device); symbol display means containing the reels 14, the stepping motor 70 and the like, is a gaming machine 10 connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 which accumulatively counts the number of games in each gaming machine 10 of plural gaming machines 10, and wherein the main CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43 (see
FIG. 11 ); a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program(see FIGS. 13 to 15); a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when a combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program (seeFIG. 16 ); a processing transmitting through the communication line to the control device 200 the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in RAM 43 each time a game is played (step S90 inFIG. 19 ); a processing for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games accumulatively counted, based on the identification information of the gaming machine, by the control device 200 reaches a set value is established (step S91 inFIG. 19 ); and a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for executing the transition to the return mode (the generating of the second special game state) in which the number of winning lines is increased to 5 based on the command signal, and executing the program (seeFIG. 17 ). - A gaming machine 10 connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 which accumulatively counts the number of games for each gaming machine 10 of plural gaming machines 10, comprising: winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining a winning combination by lottery; symbol display means (for example, the reels 14, the stepping motor 70 and the like) for executing change display and stop display based on a result of executing the lottery program; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for transmitting the identification information of the gaming machine 10 through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 each time a game is played; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device 200 when a condition that the number of games accumulatively counted by the control device 200 based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value is established; and means (for example, the main CPU 41) for generating the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is increased to 5 based on the command signal.
- According to the
gaming machine 10, a game state shifts to the return mode without fail by receiving a command signal transmitted from thecontrol device 200 when the number of games counted in thecontrol device 200 reaches a set value. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the bonus game is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the first special game state is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, a game state shifts to the return mode as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game. - The
gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment is connected through thecommunication line 101 to thecontrol device 200 and thecontrol device 200 counts a number of games in thegaming machine 10, and determines whether a game state is to be shifted to the return mode or not (whether the second special game state is to be generated or not). Thegaming machine 10 is, however, not necessarily required to be those using a network and may be standalone. - A stand-
alone gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes: the main CPU 41 (processing device); RAM 43 (storage device); symbol display device containing thereels 14, the stepping motor 70 and the like, wherein themain CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored inRAM 43; a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program (see FIGS. 13 to 15); a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing counting accumulatively the number of games each time a game is played; a processing determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value has been established; and a processing reading from the storage device a program for executing the transition to the return mode (generating a second special game state) in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased when said condition is determined to have been established, and executing the program. - The
gaming machine 10 comprises: winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining a winning combination by a lottery; symbol display means (for example, thereels 14, the stepping motor 70 and the like) for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for counting accumulatively the number of games each time a game is played; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value has been established; and means (for example, the main CPU 41) for executing the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) in which the number of winning lines is increased to 5 when said condition is determined to have been established. - In addition, in the
gaming machine 10 according the first embodiment, although the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) is executed when the number of games reached the set value, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. - When the payment balance in terms of coins becomes equal to or below the set value, the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) may be executed in the
gaming machine 10 of the present invention. - Such a gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment including: the main CPU 41 (processing device); RAM 43 (storage device); symbol display device containing the reels 14, the stepping motor 70 and the like, is a gaming machine 10 connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 which accumulatively counts the payment balance in terms of the game media in each gaming machine 10 of plural gaming machines 10, and wherein the main CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43; a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program; a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing transmitting through the communication line to the control device 200 the payment balance in terms of the game media together with the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in RAM 43 each time a game is played (step S90 in
FIG. 19 ); a processing for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively counted, based on the identification information of the gaming machine by the control device 200 becomes equal to or below a set value is established(step S91 inFIG. 19 ); and a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for executing the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) in which the number of winning lines is increased to 5 based on the command signal, and executing the program (seeFIG. 17 ). - A gaming machine 10 connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 which accumulatively counts the payment balance in terms of the game media for each gaming machine 10 of plural gaming machines 10 comprising: winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining a winning combination by lottery; symbol display means (for example, the reels 14, the stepping motor 70 and the like) for executing change display and stop display based on a result of executing the lottery program; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for transmitting through the communication line to the control device 200 the payment balance in terms of the game media together with the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in RAM 43 each time a game is played; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively counted, based on the identification information of the gaming machine by the control device 200 becomes equal to or below a set value is established; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for reading from RAM 43 a program for generating the second special game state in which the number of winning lines is increased to 5 based on the command signal.
- According to the
gaming machine 10, a game state shifts to the return mode without fail by receiving a command signal transmitted from thecontrol device 200 when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively counted, based on the identification information of the gaming machine by thecontrol device 200 becomes equal to or below a set value is established. Since establishment possibility that the combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on the winning line is the special winning combination becomes high by increasing the number of winning lines, the bonus game is likely to be generated. Therefore, even if the bonus game is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, a game state shifts to the return mode as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can plays the game in advantageous state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game. - The above mentioned
gaming machine 10 is connected through thecommunication line 101 to thecontrol device 200 and thecontrol device 200 counts a number of coins in thegaming machine 10, and determines whether a game state is to be shifted to the return mode or not (whether the second special game state is to be generated or not). Thegaming machine 10 is, however, not necessarily required to be those using a network and may be standalone. - A stand-
alone gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes: the main CPU 41 (processing device); RAM 43 (storage device); symbol display device containing thereels 14, the stepping motor 70 and the like, wherein themain CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored inRAM 43; a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program; a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing counting accumulatively the payment balance in terms of the game media each time a game is played; a processing determining whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below a set value is established; and a processing reading from the storage device a program for executing the transition to the return mode (generating a second special game state) in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased when said condition is determined to have been established, and executing the program. - A
gaming machine 10 comprising: winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining a winning combination by lottery; symbol display means (for example, thereels 14, the stepping motor 70 and the like) for executing change display and stop display based on a result of executing the lottery program; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for counting accumulatively the payment balance in terms of the game media each time a game is played; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media reaches the set value has been established; and means (for example, the main CPU 41) for executing the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) in which the number of winning lines is increased to 5 when said condition is determined to have been established. - In the
gaming machine 10 in which the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) is executed when the payment balance in terms of coins becomes below the set value, it is preferable that the main CPU 41 (processing device) executes a program for shifting to the return mode in which the a number of coins corresponding to the accumulatively counted number of the games is paid out. That is, it is preferable that the means for generating the second special game state (for example, the main CPU 41) pays out a number of the game media corresponding to the accumulatively counted number of the games in the second special game state until the second special game state is generated. - According to
such gaming machine 10, for example, in a case where the accumulatively counted number of the games until the game state shifts to the return mode is “600”, 6000 coins which corresponds to 10 times of that number are paid out. Thus, the player can receive a profit according to the number of game played by the player in the second special game state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game. - Next, a gaming machine according to a second embodiment will be described.
- According to the gaming machine in the second embodiment, when a condition that the accumulatively counted number of the games reaches a set value is established, the gaming machine generates a second special game state in which the player can play the game in an advantageous game state. The second special game state is a game state generated only when the above condition is established in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
- In addition, since an appearance and a hard constitution of the gaming machine in the second embodiment is almost the same as that of the gaming machine in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 1 to 5), a description for them will be omitted here. In addition, the same numerical references are assigned to the elements corresponding to those in the first embodiment.
- In addition, the processing in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is almost the same as that in the gaming machine-according to the first embodiment except for the return mode processing (in
FIGS. 17 and 18 ) called and executed in step S20 in the subroutine shown inFIG. 10 . Here, a return mode process will be only described and other processings are not described. -
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the return mode processing in the second embodiment. - According to the return mode in the second embodiment, a free game is played. In the free game, the total number of coin-out to be paid out is determined at the beginning. Then, the free game is finished when the total number of coin-out is all paid out. However, when a bonus game trigger is established, a predetermined number of payout is added to the total number of payout. Therefore, in the return mode corresponding to the second embodiment, when the bonus game trigger is established, the player can get more coins. In addition, the winning combination of the small number of payout coins is established more often, the larger the number of games becomes, so that the possibility of establishment of the bonus game trigger becomes high.
- The subroutine shown in
FIG. 20 is executed when themain CPU 41 executes a program for shifting to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) stored inRAM 43. The program is an exclusive program for the return mode and it is executed only in the return mode. - First, the
main CPU 41 determines the number P of total payout in the return mode based on the payment balance in terms of coins transmitted from acontrol device 200 as a return command signal and stored in RAM 43 (step S200). According to the second embodiment, the number corresponding to 50% of the payment balance in terms of coins is set as the number P of total payout in the return mode. For example, when the payment balance in terms of coins is “−10000”, the number P of total payout in the return mode is set as 5000. However, when the number P of total payout determined based on the payment balance in terms of coins does not reach a predetermined lower limit value (for example, 3000), a predetermined number is set as the number P of total payout. - Next, the
main CPU 41 executes a random numbers generation program included in a lottery program to select a random number values corresponding to each of threereels 14 from the numerical value range of 0 to 255 (step S201). Then, themain CPU 41 refers to payout rate setting data which is outputted fromGAL 54 and stored inRAM 43, and determines, based on the selected three random number values, code Nos. (seeFIG. 3 ) (step S202). - In addition, the payout rate setting data is an exclusive data for the return mode and it is used in the return mode only.
- The winning combination is determined in step S202.
- Here, the return mode according to the second embodiment will be described.
-
FIG. 21 is a figure schematically showing a relation between a plural winning combination, establishment possibility of the winning combination and the number of payout in the return mode according to the second embodiment. The establishment possibility shown in the figure shows the establishment possibility of the winning combination when the code No. of eachreel 14 is determined based on the three random number values referring to the symbol weighting data. That is, the random number value does not correspond to each winning combination. - Establishment possibility of the bonus game trigger is 0.5%. When the bonus game trigger is won in the return mode, the three “APPLE” symbols are stop displayed on the winning line and the number P of payout is added to the number P of total payout. However, the coins are not paid out and a bonus game is not generated. In addition, in the second embodiment, the added number P of payout is previously set as 3000.
- Relating to other winning combinations, the higher the establishment possibility becomes, the larger the number of payout becomes. In addition, when no winning combination is established (in case of failure), the number of payout is given by subtracting accumulated number R of payout in the return mode from the total number of payout.
- Next, the
main CPU 41 executes a rotating control processing of the reel (step S203). Since content of this processing is the same as that in step S14 of the subroutine shown inFIG. 10 (see FIGS. 13 to 15), its description will be omitted. - The correspondence relationship between the plural kinds of the winning combinations and their number of payout is stored as data in
RAM 43. The data (referred to as the number of payout data occasionally hereinafter) is an exclusive data for the return mode, therefore, it is used only when a game shifts to the return mode. - Next, the
main CPU 41 determines whether a bonus game trigger has been established (hit) or not, that is whether “APPLE” is stop displayed in thedisplay window 15 or not (step S204) If it is determined that the bonus game trigger has been established, themain CPU 41 refers to the number of payout data (seeFIG. 21 ) stored inRAM 43 and determines the number P of payout to be added to the number P of total payout (step S205). Then, themain CPU 41 reads out the number P of total payout determined in step S200 and stored inRAM 43, adds the number P of payout determined in step S205 to the number P of total payout and stores the given number P of total payout in RAM 43 (step S206). - On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus game trigger is not established in step S204, the
main CPU 41 executes coin-out of number Q corresponding to established winning combination (including a lost condition) (step S208). The coin-out of number Q in step S208 is determined by referring to the number of payout data (seeFIG. 21 ) stored inRAM 43. - Then, the
main CPU 41 updates the accumulated number R of payout in the return mode by adding the number Q of payout determined in step S208 to the given accumulated number R of payout stored inRAM 43 in the return mode, and stores it in RAM 43 (step S209). - If the processing is executed in step S206 or S209, the
main CPU 41 determines whether the accumulated number R of payout is equal to or more than the number P of total payout or not (step S210). When it is determined that the accumulated number R of payout is not equal to or more than the number P of total payout, the operation is returned to step S201. On the other hand, it is determined that the accumulated number R of payout is equal to or more than the number P of total payout, themain CPU 41 sets a return mode flag to “OFF” (step S211), and terminates this subroutine. - As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment including: the main CPU 41 (processing device ), and RAM 43 (storage device), is a gaming machine 10 connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 which accumulatively counts the number of games every gaming machine 10 in each gaming machine 10 of plural gaming machines 10, and wherein the main CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43; a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when a determined winning combination is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing transmitting through the communication line to the control device 200 the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in RAM 43 each time a game is played; a processing for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games accumulatively counted, based on the identification information of the gaming machine by the control device 200 reaches a set value is established; and a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for executing the transition to the return mode on the command signal, and executing the program (see
FIGS. 20 and 21 ). - The
gaming machine 10 comprises: winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining a winning combination by a lottery; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for generating the first special game state which is a game state advantageous to the player when the determined winning combination is the special winning combination; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for transmitting through the communication line to thecontrol device 200 the identification information of thegaming machine 10 each time a game is played; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for receiving the command signal transmitted from thecontrol device 200 when the condition that the number of games accumulatively counted by thecontrol device 200 based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and means (for example, the main CPU 41) for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established. - According to the
gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, when a condition in which the number of games counted by thecontrol device 200 reaches the set value is established, transition to the return mode that is the advantageous state for the player is executed. Therefore, even if the bonus game is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, transition of the return mode is executed as long as the game is played such that the number of games reaches the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the return mode is shifted only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented that the player who used many coins feels frustrated, raises distrust, or loses interest in the game. - The
gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment is connected through thecommunication line 101 to thecontrol device 200 and thecontrol device 200 counts a number of games in thegaming machine 10, and determines whether a game state is to be shifted to the return mode or not (whether the second special game state is to be generated or not). Thegaming machine 10 is, however, not necessarily required to be those using a network and may be standalone. - A stand-
alone gaming machine 10 according to the present invention includes: the main CPU 41 (processing device) and RAM 43 (storage device); wherein themain CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored inRAM 43; a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when a determined winning combination is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing for accumulatively counting the number of games each time the game is played; a processing for determining whether a condition that the number of games reaches the set value is established or not; and a processing for reading a program for shifting to the return mode that is generated only in a case where the above condition is established when it is determined that above condition is established fromRAM 43, and executing the program. - The
gaming machine 10 comprises; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining the winning combination by a lottery; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to the player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for accumulatively counting the number of games each time the game is played; means for determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and means (for example, the main CPU 41) for generating a second special game state which is a game state advantageous to the player and is generated only when it is determined that the above condition is established. - In addition, in the
gaming machine 10 according the second embodiment, although the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) is executed when the number of games reached the set value, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. - When the payment balance in terms of coins becomes equal to or below the set value, the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) may be executed in the
gaming machine 10 of the present invention. - Such gaming machine 10 including: the main CPU 41 (processing device); RAM 43 (storage device), is a gaming machine 1 connected through the communication line 101 to the control device 200 which accumulatively counts the payment balance in terms of coins in each gaming machine 10 of plural gaming machines 10, and wherein the main CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in RAM 43; a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game (the first special game state) when the predetermined winning combination is a special winning combination “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing transmitting through the communication line to the control device 200 the payment balance in terms of coins together with the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in RAM 43 each time a game is played; a processing for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the payment balance in terms of coins accumulatively counted by the control device 200, based on the payment balance in terms of the coins in a game played by the player becomes equal to or below a set value is established; and a processing for reading a program for shifting to the return mode from RAM 43, and executing the program.
- In addition, the
gaming machine 10 comprises: means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining the winning combination by a lottery; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to the player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for transmitting through the communication line to thecontrol device 200 the identification information of thegaming machine 10 each time a game is played; means (themain CPU 41, for example) for receiving a command signal transmitted from thecontrol device 200 when a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media accumulatively counted by thecontrol device 200 based on the identification information of the gaming machine becomes below the set value is established; and means (for example, the main CPU 41) for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established. - According to the
gaming machine 10, when a condition in which the payment balance in terms of coins a counted by thecontrol device 200 becomes equal to or below the set value is established, transition to the return mode that is the advantageous state for the player is executed. Therefore, even if the bonus game is not generated for a long period of time leading to the spending of many of the game media, transition of the return mode is executed as long as the game is played such that the payment balance in terms of coins becomes equal to or below the set value, thus a player can make profit for playing the game. In addition, since the return mode is shifted only when the above condition is established, an impression can be made on the player that a return is carried out as a result of playing the game until the payment balance in terms of coins becomes equal to or below the set value, and the player take more interest in the game. As a result, it can be prevented that the player who used many coins feels frustrated, raises distrust, or loses interest in the game. - The
gaming machine 10 is connected through thecommunication line 101 to thecontrol device 200 and thecontrol device 200 counts the payment balance in terms of coins in thegaming machine 10, and determines whether a game state is to be shifted to the return mode or not (whether the second special game state is to be generated or not). Thegaming machine 10 is, however, not necessarily required to be those using a network and may be standalone. - Such a
gaming machine 10 includes: the main CPU 41 (processing device) and RAM 43 (storage device); wherein themain CPU 41 executes: a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored inRAM 43; a processing reading from RAM 43 a program for generating a bonus game when a determined winning combination is a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, and executing the program; a processing for accumulatively counting the payment balance in terms of coins each time the game is played; a processing for determining whether a condition that the payment balance in terms of coins becomes equal to or below the set value is established or not; and a processing for reading a program for shifting to the return mode that is generated only in a case where the above condition is established when it is determined that above condition is established fromRAM 43, and executing the program. - The
gaming machine 10 comprises: winning combination determining means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining a winning combination by a lottery; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for generating the first special game state which is a game state advantageous to the player when the determined winning combination is the special winning combination; means (for example, the main CPU 41) for accumulatively counting the payment balance in terms of the game media each time the game is played; means for determining whether or not a condition that the payment balance in terms of the game media becomes equal to or below the set value is established; and means for generating the second special game state which is a game state advantageous to the player and is generated only when it is determined that the above condition is established. - According to the
gaming machine 10 in which the transition to the return mode (generation of the second special game state) is executed when the payment balance in terms of coins becomes equal to or below the set value, it is preferable that the main CPU 41 (processing device) executes a program to make the transition to the return mode in which the coins are paid out according to the accumulatively counted number of the games. That is, it is preferable that the means for generating the second special game state (themain CPU 41, for example) payouts the number of the game media in the second special game state according to the accumulatively counted the number of games until the second special game state is generated. - According to
such gaming machine 10, for example, when the number of games accumulatively counted until a game shifts to the return mode is “600”, 6000 coins corresponding to ten times the number of the game media are paid out. Thus, the player can be received profit corresponding to the number of games the player played in the second special game state. As a result, it can be prevented for a player who has spent many of the game media from feeling unpleasant against the game, building up distrust thereto, or losing interest in or a concern on the game. - The description has been made of the case where the kind of the game in the return mode is an exclusive return mode and the program for the return mode only is stored in
RAM 43 working as the storage device in the second embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to the above case. - For example, presentation in the return mode may be only for the return mode. In this case, an exclusive presentation data for the return mode only is stored in the storage device (for example, RAM 43). The presentation data includes image data, audio data, data for defining a lighting pattern of a lamp or LED and the like.
- In addition, a relationship between the winning combination in the return mode and the number of payout in terms of the game media may be used exclusively for the return mode. In this case, the number of payout data only for the return mode (data showing the relationship between the winning combination and the number of payout in terms of the game media) is stored in the storage device (for example, RAM 43).
- In addition, the establishment possibility of the winning combination in the return mode may be only for the return mode. In this case, the
GAL 54 is configured such that only payout setting data for the return mode is outputted when predetermined data is inputted. - More specifically, according to the present invention, the following configuration may be employed. For example, the mystery bonus may be executed in the bonus game as the first special game state, and the mystery bonus in which the presentation image only for the return mode is displayed on the lower
image display panel 16 may be executed in the return mode as the second special game state. - In addition, a free game may be executed in the bonus game as the first special game state, and a free game whose presentation mode is changed when the remaining number of the games reaches a predetermined set value may be performed in the return mode as the special game state. The free game whose presentation mode is changed when the number of the remaining number of the games reaches a predetermined set value includes the following free game. In this free game, brightness of the lower image display panel (transparent liquid crystal panel) 16 provided in front of the
reel 14 is increased when the remaining number of the games reaches 30 games. In addition, when the remaining number of the games reaches 30 games, presentation concerning thebelly glass 34 may be performed by lighting or flashing the LED or the lamp, provided that the LED or the lamp is provided on the rear side of thebelly glass 34. - Furthermore, in the return mode as the second special game state, only a presentation image may be changed with the establishment possibility of the bonus game as the first special game state and the winning combination remaining unchanged. Furthermore, in the bonus game as the first special game state, only the free game may be played, and in the return mode as the second special game state, one game may be selected from the several kinds of the games and the selected game may be performed.
- In the present embodiment, description has been given of a case where a game state shifts to the return mode when the return mode flag has been set to the state “ON”, without other conditions being established there after. The present invention is, however, not limited to this example and, for example, a game state may shift to the return mode when a predetermined condition has been met after the return mode flag is set to the state “ON”. In such a case, the predetermined condition for transition to the return mode is not particularly limited, and may include, for example, establishment of a bonus game trigger, stop display of a predetermined combination of symbols, and of the like conditions.
- In the present embodiment, description has been given of a case where a game state shifts to the return mode when the return mode flag is set to the state “ON”, regardless of the combination of symbols stop displayed thereafter. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a combination of symbols corresponding to the transition to the return mode may be set in advance and a game state may shift to the return mode after the symbols are stop displayed in that winning combination.
- In the present embodiment, description has been given of a case where symbols are stop displayed (step S14 in
FIG. 10 ), a processing is conducted based on the stop displayed combination of symbols (steps S15 to S20 inFIG. 10 ), and the number of games is counted (step S22 inFIG. 10 ) thereafter. In the present invention, however, no specific limitation is placed on a timing at which counting of the number of games is conducted. For example, the timing may be a timing at which BET of a coin is conducted (after step S10 or S11 inFIG. 10 ) or a timing at which the spin button is turned ON (after step S12 inFIG. 10 ). The number of games may be counted at a predetermined timing that is in the period from the time when display of a change in symbol is started, to the time when symbol sequences are stop displayed, and a processing based on the stop displayed combination of symbols has been conducted (for example, a timing at which symbol sequences are stop displayed). Note that a timing at which a payment balance in terms of game media can be the same as described above. - In the present embodiment, description has been given of a
gaming machine 10 in which in a case where a special winning combination, “bonus game trigger”, has been established (step S15 inFIG. 10 ) in the period from the time when the return mode flag is set to the state “ON” (step S22 inFIG. 10 ), to the time when transition to the return mode is conducted (step S20 inFIG. 10 ), transitions to the return mode is further conducted after the bonus game is generated (step S16 inFIG. 10 ). That is, a gaming machine according to the present embodiment generates the first special game state based on the a special winning combination, and further generates the second special game state, in a case where the special winning combination is established in the period from the time when the number of games reaches a set value, to the time when the second special game state is generated. - However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, in a case where a special winning combination is established in the period from the time when the number of games reaches a set value, to the time when the second special game state is generated, only the first special game state may be generated. In a case where the above embodiment is adopted, a player can earn a profit in the first special game state or the second special game state without fail when a game is played until the number of games reaches the set value. The above embodiment is one of the embodiments of the present invention. In a case where the above embodiment is adopted for the
gaming machine 10, for example, the following processing has only to be conducted instead of the processing shown inFIG. 10 . -
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing another example of a subroutine of a game execution processing. In the flowchart shown inFIG. 22 , the same numerical references are assigned to steps which conduct processing similar to those in the flowchart shown inFIG. 10 . - After the processing in steps S10 to S14 are executed, the
main CPU 41 determines whether a bonus game trigger has been established or not (step S15) and if it is determined that the bonus game trigger has been established, a bonus game processing is executed (step S16). Then, it is determined whether a return mode flag is set to the state “ON” or not (step S25) and if the return mode flag is set to “ON”, the return mode flag is set to the state “OFF” (step S26). The processing in step S21 is performed there after and thus the present subroutine is completed. Since the other processing are processing similar to those described inFIG. 10 , descriptions thereof are omitted here. In the subroutine shown inFIG. 22 , after a coins is BET (step S10), in a case where it is determined whether thespin button 23 has been turned ON or not (step S12), and if it is determined that the spin button has been turned ON (YES in step S12), a processing for subtracting the number of credits (step S11) may be conducted, as in the subroutine shown inFIG. 10 . - A more specific description of the processing shown in
FIG. 22 will be given here with a case where a set value is 600. In a case where, in step S22, the number of games reaches 600 and a return mode flag has been established, if a bonus game trigger has been established (step S15) in the 601st game, the bonus game is generated (step S16) but transition to the return mode is not performed (steps S25 and S26). On the other hand, in a case where a bonus game trigger has not been established in the 601st game run, transition to the return mode is conducted (steps S19 and S20). - Hence, in a case where the processing shown in
FIG. 22 is performed, a bonus game is generated or transition to the return mode is performed without fail, when the number of games reaches a set value. - In the present invention, in a case where a special winning combination has been established in the period from the time when the number of games reaches a set value, to the time when the second special game state is generated, only the second special game state may be generated, or alternatively, either the first special game state or the second special game state may be generated depending on a game situation and the like.
- An embodiment similar to the above-mentioned embodiment can also be adopted in a case where the second special game state is generated according to a payment balance in terms of game media. In other words, in a case where a special winning combination has been established in the period from the time when a payment balance in terms of game media is equal to or less than a set value, to the time when the second special game state is generated, only the first special game state may be generated, only the second special game state may be generated, or either the first special game state or the second special game state may be generated depending on a game situation and the like.
- In the return mode as the second special game state, a return situation to a player may be simply as such that a predetermined number of game media is paid out as an exclusive bonus only in a case where the following condition is established when the condition in which number of games reaches a set value is established. It may alternatively be a situation that when a condition in which the number of games reaches a set value is established, the return mode as the second special game state, allowing a player to have a privilege in a similar manner to the first special game state such as a free game, a second game, a mystery game and the like, can be set, and a predetermined number of game media is paid out by one of the above-mentioned game mode. However, in this case, it is required that the embodiment conducted in the second special game state is not to be conducted in the first special game state and the payout in that embodiment is to be the special bonus only when the above condition is established.
- Both embodiments described above correspond to the second special game state in the present invention.
- A timing at which a predetermined number of game media is paid out is not limited to such a timing at which one game is completed and symbol sequences are stop displayed as in the mystery game described above, and for example, game media may be immediately paid out when the number of games reaches a set value.
- Moreover, a method for paying out a predetermined number of game media is also not particularly limited, and for example, coins may be actually paid out, the number of credits may be increased, or a ticket such as a ticket with a bar code may be issued.
- However, in order to be able to discriminate and recognize whether a player is paid out by an ordinary game or a bonus game (the first special game state), or by the return mode (the second special game state), it is necessary to perform the following way. That is, in a case where coins are actually paid out in mystery bonus of the return mode (the second special game state), the timing for payout is required to be different from those of an ordinary game and bonus game (the first special game state). Moreover, it is required that payout in an ordinary game and a bonus game (the first special game state) is performed with actual coins and payout in the return mode (the second special game state) is performed with a ticket described above. With such an embodiment adopted, payout in an ordinary game and a bonus game (the first special game state), and payout in the return mode (the second special game state) can be discriminated from each other.
- Although the embodiment according to the present invention has been described, the description presents only some of the specific examples, and is not intended to limit the present invention in any way and specific constructions of each means and the like can be properly changed in terms of design. Besides, the effects described in the embodiment of the present invention are only the most preferable effects generated from the present invention and effects to be caused by the present invention is not limited to those described in the embodiment of the present invention.
Claims (22)
1. A gaming machine comprising:
winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
means for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination; and
means for, when a condition that the number of games accumulatively counted each time a game is played reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established, generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established.
2. A gaming machine connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
comprising:
winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
means for generating a first special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination;
means for transmitting an identification information of a gaming machine to the control device through the communication line each time a game is played;
means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and
means for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established based on the command signal.
3. A gaming machine comprising:
winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
means for generating a first special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination;
means for counting accumulatively the number of games each time a game is played;
means for determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established; and
means for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is determined to have been established.
4. The gaming machine according to claim 1 ,
wherein
the means for generating the second special game state payout the number of game media corresponding to the payment balance in terms of the game media which is accumulatively counted until the second special game state is generated, in the second special game state.
5. The gaming machine according to claim 1 ,
wherein
reception means that can accept for one game an insertion of game media up to a predetermined upper limit value is provided, and the means for generating the second special game state generates the second special game state in a case when the number of inserted game media for the game played by the player is equal to the upper limit when a condition that the number of games reaches the set value is established.
6. A gaming machine comprising:
winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery;
means for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination; and
means for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines defined by the symbol display means is relatively increased when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively every time a game is played reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established.
7. A gaming machine connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
comprising:
winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery;
means for generating a first special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination;
means for transmitting an identification information of a gaming machine to the control device through the communication line each time a game is played;
means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and
means for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines defined by the symbol display means is relatively increased, based on the command signal.
8. A gaming machine comprising:
winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by a lottery;
symbol display means for executing change display and stop display of plural symbols based on a result of the lottery;
means for generating a first special game state which is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination;
means for counting accumulatively the number of games each time a game is played;
means for determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established; and
means for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines defined by the symbol display means is relatively increased when said condition is determined to have been established.
9. A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device,
wherein
the processing device executes:
a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only in a case where said condition is established when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively every time a game is played reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established.
10. A gaming machine equipped with a processing device and a storage device, and connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
wherein
the processing device executes:
a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
a processing transmitting an identification information of a gaming machine stored in the storage device to the control device through the communication line each time a game is played;
a processing receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and
a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is established based on the command signal, and executing the program.
11. A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device,
wherein
the processing device executes:
a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
a processing counting the number of games accumulatively each time a game is played;
a processing determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established; and
a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player and is generated only when said condition is determined to have been established, and executing the program.
12. The gaming machine according to claim 9 ,
wherein
the processing device executes a program for generating the second special game state in which the number of the game media corresponding the payment balance in terms of the game media counted accumulatively until the generation of second special game state is paid out.
13. The gaming machine according to claim 9 ,
wherein
the processing device executes a program for generating the second special game state in a case when the number of inserted game media for the game played by the player is equal to the predetermined upper limit of the number of inserted game media for the game played by the player when a condition that the number of game media reaches the set value is established.
14. A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device, and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols,
wherein
the processing device executes:
a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program;
a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program; and
a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of the winning lines is relatively increased when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively every time a game is played reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established.
15. A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols, and connected through a communication line to a control device which counts the number of games accumulatively for every gaming machine of plural gaming machines,
wherein
the processing device executes:
a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program;
a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
a processing transmitting an identification information of the gaming machine stored in the storage device to a control device through the communication line every time a game is played;
a processing receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a condition that the number of games counted accumulatively by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games is established; and
a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased based on the command signal, and executing the program.
16. A gaming machine equipped with a processing device, a storage device, and a symbol display device which can execute change display and stop display of plural symbols,
wherein
the processing device executes:
a processing determining one winning combination selected from plural winning combinations determined in advance by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
a processing executing stop display after executing change display by operating the symbol display device based on a result of executing the lottery program;
a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a first special game state that is a game state advantageous to a player when combination of the plural symbols stop displayed on winning line defined by the symbol display means is a special winning combination, and executing the program;
a processing counting accumulatively the number of games each time a game is played;
a processing determining whether or not a condition that the number of games reaches the set value set as an object of comparison with the number of games has been established; and
a processing reading from the storage device a program for generating a second special game state in which the number of winning lines is relatively increased when said condition is determined to have been established, and executing the program.
17. A gaming machine comprising:
means for giving a profit to a player based on a result of a lottery; and
means for giving a profit given only in a case where the following condition is satisfied to the player when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition.
18. A gaming machine comprising:
means for giving a profit to a player according to the combination of symbols stop displayed on winning line based on a result of a lottery; and
means for increasing the number of the winning lines when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition.
19. A game control method comprising:
a step for giving a profit to a player based on a result of a lottery; and
a step for giving a profit given only in a case where the following condition is satisfied to the player when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition.
20. A game control method comprising:
a step for giving a profit to a player according to combination of symbols stop displayed on winning line based on a result of a lottery; and
a step for increasing the number of the winning lines when the number of games played by the player satisfies a predetermined condition.
21. A game system equipped with a gaming machine and a control device, wherein
the control device includes:
means for transmitting a signal to the gaming machine when the number of games played by a player in the gaming machine satisfies a predetermined condition; and
the gaming machine includes:
means for giving a profit to the player based on a result of a lottery; and
means for giving a profit to the player only when the above condition is satisfied based on the signal from the control device.
22. A game system equipped with a gaming machine and a control device, wherein
the control device includes:
means for transmitting a signal to the gaming machine when the number of games played by a player in the gaming machine satisfies a predetermined condition,
and the gaming machine includes:
means for giving a profit to the player according to the combination of symbols stop displayed on winning line based on the result of a lottery, and
means for increasing the number of winning lines based on the signal from the control device.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2005/015797 WO2007026399A1 (en) | 2005-08-30 | 2005-08-30 | Game machine, game control method, and game system |
WOPCT/JP05/15797 | 2005-08-30 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20070060282A1 true US20070060282A1 (en) | 2007-03-15 |
Family
ID=37808505
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/262,804 Abandoned US20070060282A1 (en) | 2005-08-30 | 2005-11-01 | Gaming machine, game control method and game system |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US20070060282A1 (en) |
JP (1) | JPWO2007026399A1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2007026399A1 (en) |
Cited By (26)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20080058050A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-03-06 | Aruze Corp. | Gaming machine |
US20080064476A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-03-13 | Aruze Corp. | Slot machine and control method of game |
US20080064475A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-03-13 | Aruze Corp. | Gaming machine |
US20080064474A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-03-13 | Aruze Corp. | Slot machine and control method of game |
US20080064473A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-03-13 | Aruze Corp. | Slot machine and control method of game |
US20080119259A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-05-22 | Aruze Corp. | Gaming machine |
US20080139287A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-06-12 | Aruze Corp. | Gaming machine |
US20080146310A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-06-19 | Aruze Corp. | Slot machine and control method of game |
US20080214275A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-09-04 | Aruze Corp. | Slot machine and control method of game |
US20080275347A1 (en) * | 2007-05-03 | 2008-11-06 | The General Electric Company | Stimulation Arrangement For Measurement Of Physiological Signal Reactivity |
US20080293482A1 (en) * | 2001-10-05 | 2008-11-27 | Aruze Co., Ltd. | Game server, game control method, and game machine |
US20080293497A1 (en) * | 2001-10-22 | 2008-11-27 | Aruze Co., Ltd. | Game server, game machine under control of the server, and game control method |
US20080311982A1 (en) * | 2001-10-09 | 2008-12-18 | Aruze Corporation | Game server, game machine, game control server, and game control method |
US20090029760A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2009-01-29 | Aruze Corp. | Slot machine and control method of game |
US20090054150A1 (en) * | 2001-10-12 | 2009-02-26 | Aruze Corp. | Game server, game control method, and game machine |
US20090186696A1 (en) * | 2007-08-23 | 2009-07-23 | Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Limited | Gaming system, method of gaming and a sound controller |
US20100304823A1 (en) * | 2009-06-01 | 2010-12-02 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Gaming machine capable of awarding payout based on the number of games played and playing method thereof |
US8002632B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-08-23 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Game server, game machine, and game control method |
US8033907B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-10-11 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Slot machine and control method of game |
US8062118B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-11-22 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Slot machine and control method of game |
US8083579B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-12-27 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Slot machine and control method of game |
US8187078B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2012-05-29 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Game server, game machine, and game control method |
US8342936B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2013-01-01 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Slot machine and control method of game |
US8622804B2 (en) | 2009-06-01 | 2014-01-07 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Gaming machine which is executable rescue process in response to insurance bet and gaming method thereof |
US8864584B2 (en) | 2008-06-03 | 2014-10-21 | Wms Gaming Inc. | Wagering game machine with area sound panning |
US20210375094A1 (en) * | 2020-05-28 | 2021-12-02 | Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. | Systems and techniques for wager-associated parameter control graphical state management |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2010274046A (en) | 2009-06-01 | 2010-12-09 | Universal Entertainment Corp | Gaming machine and control method of the same |
Citations (42)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4283709A (en) * | 1980-01-29 | 1981-08-11 | Summit Systems, Inc. (Interscience Systems) | Cash accounting and surveillance system for games |
US4624459A (en) * | 1985-09-12 | 1986-11-25 | Bally Manufacturing Corporation | Gaming device having random multiple payouts |
US4657256A (en) * | 1983-11-14 | 1987-04-14 | Kabushiki Kaisha Universal | Slot machine with win/loss biasing means |
US4669731A (en) * | 1985-01-11 | 1987-06-02 | Kabushiki Kaisha Universal | Slot machine which pays out upon predetermined number of consecutive lost games |
US4837728A (en) * | 1984-01-25 | 1989-06-06 | Igt | Multiple progressive gaming system that freezes payouts at start of game |
US4964638A (en) * | 1988-05-16 | 1990-10-23 | Kabushiki Kaisha Universal | Control apparatus for game machines |
US4993713A (en) * | 1988-02-03 | 1991-02-19 | Kabushiki Kaisha Universal | Game machine |
US5083785A (en) * | 1989-08-30 | 1992-01-28 | Kabushiki Kaisha Universal | Win control method and apparatus for game machines |
US5178390A (en) * | 1991-01-28 | 1993-01-12 | Kabushiki Kaisha Universal | Game machine |
US5280909A (en) * | 1992-02-06 | 1994-01-25 | Mikohn, Inc. | Gaming system with progressive jackpot |
US5611730A (en) * | 1995-04-25 | 1997-03-18 | Casino Data Systems | Progressive gaming system tailored for use in multiple remote sites: apparatus and method |
US5639088A (en) * | 1995-08-16 | 1997-06-17 | United Games, Inc. | Multiple events award system |
US5695402A (en) * | 1996-04-10 | 1997-12-09 | Stupak; Bob | Game of chance |
US5702303A (en) * | 1992-03-10 | 1997-12-30 | Kabushiki Kaisha Ace Denken | Game machine having a playing display screen |
US5770533A (en) * | 1994-05-02 | 1998-06-23 | Franchi; John Franco | Open architecture casino operating system |
US5820459A (en) * | 1994-10-12 | 1998-10-13 | Acres Gaming, Inc. | Method and apparatus for operating networked gaming devices |
US5890963A (en) * | 1996-09-30 | 1999-04-06 | Yen; Wei | System and method for maintaining continuous and progressive game play in a computer network |
US5910048A (en) * | 1996-11-29 | 1999-06-08 | Feinberg; Isadore | Loss limit method for slot machines |
US6003013A (en) * | 1996-05-24 | 1999-12-14 | Harrah's Operating Company, Inc. | Customer worth differentiation by selective activation of physical instrumentalities within the casino |
US6001016A (en) * | 1996-12-31 | 1999-12-14 | Walker Asset Management Limited Partnership | Remote gaming device |
US6033307A (en) * | 1998-03-06 | 2000-03-07 | Mikohn Gaming Corporation | Gaming machines with bonusing |
US6089980A (en) * | 1996-06-18 | 2000-07-18 | Atronic Casino Technology Distribution Gmbh | Method for the determination of a shared jackpot winning |
US6224482B1 (en) * | 1997-09-10 | 2001-05-01 | Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd | Slot machine game-progressive jackpot with decrementing jackpot |
US6234896B1 (en) * | 1997-04-11 | 2001-05-22 | Walker Digital, Llc | Slot driven video story |
US6244957B1 (en) * | 1996-12-30 | 2001-06-12 | Walker Digital, Llc | Automated play gaming device |
US6270409B1 (en) * | 1999-02-09 | 2001-08-07 | Brian Shuster | Method and apparatus for gaming |
US6273820B1 (en) * | 1999-02-04 | 2001-08-14 | Haste, Iii Thomas E. | Virtual player gaming method |
US20020055382A1 (en) * | 2000-10-04 | 2002-05-09 | Jason Meyer | Gaming machine |
US20030054873A1 (en) * | 2001-09-20 | 2003-03-20 | Peterson Lance R. | Gaming device having interactive message |
US20030064810A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2003-04-03 | Kazuo Okada | Game server, game machine, and game control method |
US20030064809A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2003-04-03 | Kazuo Okada | Game server, game machine, and game control method |
US20030069067A1 (en) * | 2001-10-09 | 2003-04-10 | Kazuo Okada | Game server, game machine, game control server, and game control method |
US20030069073A1 (en) * | 2001-10-05 | 2003-04-10 | Kazuo Okada | Game server, game control method, and game machine |
US20030073488A1 (en) * | 2001-10-17 | 2003-04-17 | Konami Corporation | Recording medium storing game progress control program, game progress control program, game progress control method and video game apparatus |
US20030073487A1 (en) * | 2001-10-17 | 2003-04-17 | Aruze, Co., Ltd. | Game machine, game server, and game control method |
US20030078095A1 (en) * | 2001-10-22 | 2003-04-24 | Aruze Co., Ltd. | Game server, game machine under control of the server, and game control method |
US20030228901A1 (en) * | 2002-04-19 | 2003-12-11 | Walker Jay S. | Method and apparatus for providing a time based payment from a gaming device |
US6695697B1 (en) * | 1999-09-10 | 2004-02-24 | Aruze Co., Ltd. | Game device and medium memorizing a game program and readable by a computer for support players′ technical intervention without changing fundemental specification of the game device |
US20050159211A1 (en) * | 2004-01-20 | 2005-07-21 | Englman Allon G. | Gaming machine with feature triggering scheme |
US6932707B2 (en) * | 2000-02-24 | 2005-08-23 | Labtronix Concept Inc. | Method of choosing and distributing enhanced odds |
US6932704B2 (en) * | 1998-03-31 | 2005-08-23 | Walker Digital, Llc | Method and apparatus for operating a gaming device to dispense a specified amount |
US20060009276A1 (en) * | 2001-10-12 | 2006-01-12 | Aruze Co., Ltd. | Game server, game control method, and game machine |
Family Cites Families (16)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP4275209B2 (en) * | 1998-01-16 | 2009-06-10 | 株式会社エース電研 | Gift management system |
JP2000005380A (en) * | 1998-06-24 | 2000-01-11 | Aruze Corp | Game machine |
JP2000354685A (en) * | 1999-06-14 | 2000-12-26 | Konami Co Ltd | Game system, game controlling method, and computer- readable storage medium |
JP2001149524A (en) * | 1999-09-17 | 2001-06-05 | Aruze Corp | Game device and computer readable medium for recording game program |
JP2003117072A (en) * | 2001-10-17 | 2003-04-22 | Aruze Corp | Game server, game machine and game management method |
JP4249409B2 (en) * | 2001-11-02 | 2009-04-02 | 株式会社大都技研 | Amusement stand |
JP2003190585A (en) * | 2001-12-26 | 2003-07-08 | Aruze Corp | Game server, game machine, and method of game management |
JP2004089610A (en) * | 2002-09-04 | 2004-03-25 | Aruze Corp | Game machine, pachinko game program, and server |
JP2005066182A (en) * | 2003-08-27 | 2005-03-17 | Abilit Corp | Slot machine and game control method |
JP2005080861A (en) * | 2003-09-08 | 2005-03-31 | Aruze Corp | Game machine and game system |
JP2005087437A (en) * | 2003-09-17 | 2005-04-07 | Sanyo Product Co Ltd | Game machine |
JP2004000801A (en) * | 2003-09-26 | 2004-01-08 | Olympia:Kk | Slot machine |
JP2005192660A (en) * | 2003-12-26 | 2005-07-21 | Heiwa Corp | Game machine |
JP2005192927A (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2005-07-21 | Snk Playmore Corp | Slot machine, control method of slot machine and control program of slot machine |
JP2005211476A (en) * | 2004-01-30 | 2005-08-11 | Aruze Corp | Game machine |
JP2004223289A (en) * | 2004-05-07 | 2004-08-12 | Aruze Corp | Game machine |
-
2005
- 2005-08-30 WO PCT/JP2005/015797 patent/WO2007026399A1/en active Application Filing
- 2005-08-30 JP JP2007533072A patent/JPWO2007026399A1/en active Pending
- 2005-11-01 US US11/262,804 patent/US20070060282A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (46)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4283709A (en) * | 1980-01-29 | 1981-08-11 | Summit Systems, Inc. (Interscience Systems) | Cash accounting and surveillance system for games |
US4657256A (en) * | 1983-11-14 | 1987-04-14 | Kabushiki Kaisha Universal | Slot machine with win/loss biasing means |
US4837728A (en) * | 1984-01-25 | 1989-06-06 | Igt | Multiple progressive gaming system that freezes payouts at start of game |
US4669731A (en) * | 1985-01-11 | 1987-06-02 | Kabushiki Kaisha Universal | Slot machine which pays out upon predetermined number of consecutive lost games |
US4624459A (en) * | 1985-09-12 | 1986-11-25 | Bally Manufacturing Corporation | Gaming device having random multiple payouts |
US4993713A (en) * | 1988-02-03 | 1991-02-19 | Kabushiki Kaisha Universal | Game machine |
US4964638A (en) * | 1988-05-16 | 1990-10-23 | Kabushiki Kaisha Universal | Control apparatus for game machines |
US5083785A (en) * | 1989-08-30 | 1992-01-28 | Kabushiki Kaisha Universal | Win control method and apparatus for game machines |
US5178390A (en) * | 1991-01-28 | 1993-01-12 | Kabushiki Kaisha Universal | Game machine |
US5280909A (en) * | 1992-02-06 | 1994-01-25 | Mikohn, Inc. | Gaming system with progressive jackpot |
US5702303A (en) * | 1992-03-10 | 1997-12-30 | Kabushiki Kaisha Ace Denken | Game machine having a playing display screen |
US5770533A (en) * | 1994-05-02 | 1998-06-23 | Franchi; John Franco | Open architecture casino operating system |
US6257981B1 (en) * | 1994-10-12 | 2001-07-10 | Acres Gaming Incorporated | Computer network for controlling and monitoring gaming devices |
US5820459A (en) * | 1994-10-12 | 1998-10-13 | Acres Gaming, Inc. | Method and apparatus for operating networked gaming devices |
US5836817A (en) * | 1994-10-12 | 1998-11-17 | Acres Gaming, Inc. | Method and apparatus for operating networked gaming devices |
US6254483B1 (en) * | 1994-10-12 | 2001-07-03 | Acres Gaming Incorporated | Method and apparatus for controlling the cost of playing an electronic gaming device |
US5611730A (en) * | 1995-04-25 | 1997-03-18 | Casino Data Systems | Progressive gaming system tailored for use in multiple remote sites: apparatus and method |
US5639088A (en) * | 1995-08-16 | 1997-06-17 | United Games, Inc. | Multiple events award system |
US6024642A (en) * | 1996-04-10 | 2000-02-15 | Stupak; Bob | Game of chance |
US5695402A (en) * | 1996-04-10 | 1997-12-09 | Stupak; Bob | Game of chance |
US6003013A (en) * | 1996-05-24 | 1999-12-14 | Harrah's Operating Company, Inc. | Customer worth differentiation by selective activation of physical instrumentalities within the casino |
US6089980A (en) * | 1996-06-18 | 2000-07-18 | Atronic Casino Technology Distribution Gmbh | Method for the determination of a shared jackpot winning |
US5890963A (en) * | 1996-09-30 | 1999-04-06 | Yen; Wei | System and method for maintaining continuous and progressive game play in a computer network |
US5910048A (en) * | 1996-11-29 | 1999-06-08 | Feinberg; Isadore | Loss limit method for slot machines |
US6244957B1 (en) * | 1996-12-30 | 2001-06-12 | Walker Digital, Llc | Automated play gaming device |
US6001016A (en) * | 1996-12-31 | 1999-12-14 | Walker Asset Management Limited Partnership | Remote gaming device |
US6234896B1 (en) * | 1997-04-11 | 2001-05-22 | Walker Digital, Llc | Slot driven video story |
US6224482B1 (en) * | 1997-09-10 | 2001-05-01 | Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd | Slot machine game-progressive jackpot with decrementing jackpot |
US6033307A (en) * | 1998-03-06 | 2000-03-07 | Mikohn Gaming Corporation | Gaming machines with bonusing |
US6932704B2 (en) * | 1998-03-31 | 2005-08-23 | Walker Digital, Llc | Method and apparatus for operating a gaming device to dispense a specified amount |
US6273820B1 (en) * | 1999-02-04 | 2001-08-14 | Haste, Iii Thomas E. | Virtual player gaming method |
US6270409B1 (en) * | 1999-02-09 | 2001-08-07 | Brian Shuster | Method and apparatus for gaming |
US6695697B1 (en) * | 1999-09-10 | 2004-02-24 | Aruze Co., Ltd. | Game device and medium memorizing a game program and readable by a computer for support players′ technical intervention without changing fundemental specification of the game device |
US6932707B2 (en) * | 2000-02-24 | 2005-08-23 | Labtronix Concept Inc. | Method of choosing and distributing enhanced odds |
US20020055382A1 (en) * | 2000-10-04 | 2002-05-09 | Jason Meyer | Gaming machine |
US20030054873A1 (en) * | 2001-09-20 | 2003-03-20 | Peterson Lance R. | Gaming device having interactive message |
US20030064810A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2003-04-03 | Kazuo Okada | Game server, game machine, and game control method |
US20030064809A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2003-04-03 | Kazuo Okada | Game server, game machine, and game control method |
US20030069073A1 (en) * | 2001-10-05 | 2003-04-10 | Kazuo Okada | Game server, game control method, and game machine |
US20030069067A1 (en) * | 2001-10-09 | 2003-04-10 | Kazuo Okada | Game server, game machine, game control server, and game control method |
US20060009276A1 (en) * | 2001-10-12 | 2006-01-12 | Aruze Co., Ltd. | Game server, game control method, and game machine |
US20030073488A1 (en) * | 2001-10-17 | 2003-04-17 | Konami Corporation | Recording medium storing game progress control program, game progress control program, game progress control method and video game apparatus |
US20030073487A1 (en) * | 2001-10-17 | 2003-04-17 | Aruze, Co., Ltd. | Game machine, game server, and game control method |
US20030078095A1 (en) * | 2001-10-22 | 2003-04-24 | Aruze Co., Ltd. | Game server, game machine under control of the server, and game control method |
US20030228901A1 (en) * | 2002-04-19 | 2003-12-11 | Walker Jay S. | Method and apparatus for providing a time based payment from a gaming device |
US20050159211A1 (en) * | 2004-01-20 | 2005-07-21 | Englman Allon G. | Gaming machine with feature triggering scheme |
Cited By (41)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8187078B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2012-05-29 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Game server, game machine, and game control method |
US20080064475A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-03-13 | Aruze Corp. | Gaming machine |
US20080318657A2 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-12-25 | Aruze Corporation | Gaming machine |
US20090029760A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2009-01-29 | Aruze Corp. | Slot machine and control method of game |
US20080064473A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-03-13 | Aruze Corp. | Slot machine and control method of game |
US20080119259A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-05-22 | Aruze Corp. | Gaming machine |
US20080139287A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-06-12 | Aruze Corp. | Gaming machine |
US20080146310A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-06-19 | Aruze Corp. | Slot machine and control method of game |
US20080214275A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-09-04 | Aruze Corp. | Slot machine and control method of game |
US8371926B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2013-02-12 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Slot machine and control method of game |
US20080058050A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-03-06 | Aruze Corp. | Gaming machine |
US8342936B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2013-01-01 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Slot machine and control method of game |
US8033907B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-10-11 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Slot machine and control method of game |
US20080064476A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-03-13 | Aruze Corp. | Slot machine and control method of game |
US20080064474A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2008-03-13 | Aruze Corp. | Slot machine and control method of game |
US8083579B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-12-27 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Slot machine and control method of game |
US8083580B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-12-27 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Slot machine and control method of game |
US8062118B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-11-22 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Slot machine and control method of game |
US7887410B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-02-15 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Gaming machine |
US20110111832A1 (en) * | 2001-10-02 | 2011-05-12 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Gaming machine |
US7972208B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-07-05 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Slot machine and control method of game |
US7985131B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-07-26 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Slot machine and control method of game |
US8002632B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-08-23 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Game server, game machine, and game control method |
US8021225B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-09-20 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Gaming machine |
US8025563B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-09-27 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Gaming machine |
US8038526B2 (en) | 2001-10-02 | 2011-10-18 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Gaming machine |
US20080293482A1 (en) * | 2001-10-05 | 2008-11-27 | Aruze Co., Ltd. | Game server, game control method, and game machine |
US8192273B2 (en) | 2001-10-05 | 2012-06-05 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Game server, game control method, and game machine |
US20080311982A1 (en) * | 2001-10-09 | 2008-12-18 | Aruze Corporation | Game server, game machine, game control server, and game control method |
US8287362B2 (en) | 2001-10-09 | 2012-10-16 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Game server, game machine, game control server, and game control method |
US8172673B2 (en) | 2001-10-12 | 2012-05-08 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Game server, game control method, and game machine |
US20090054150A1 (en) * | 2001-10-12 | 2009-02-26 | Aruze Corp. | Game server, game control method, and game machine |
US20080293497A1 (en) * | 2001-10-22 | 2008-11-27 | Aruze Co., Ltd. | Game server, game machine under control of the server, and game control method |
US8485895B2 (en) | 2001-10-22 | 2013-07-16 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Game server, game machine under control of the server, and game control method executing return on judgment that cumulative credit consumption reaches upper limit |
US20080275347A1 (en) * | 2007-05-03 | 2008-11-06 | The General Electric Company | Stimulation Arrangement For Measurement Of Physiological Signal Reactivity |
US20090186696A1 (en) * | 2007-08-23 | 2009-07-23 | Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Limited | Gaming system, method of gaming and a sound controller |
US8864584B2 (en) | 2008-06-03 | 2014-10-21 | Wms Gaming Inc. | Wagering game machine with area sound panning |
US20100304823A1 (en) * | 2009-06-01 | 2010-12-02 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Gaming machine capable of awarding payout based on the number of games played and playing method thereof |
US8398478B2 (en) | 2009-06-01 | 2013-03-19 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Gaming machine capable of awarding payout based on the number of games played and playing method thereof |
US8622804B2 (en) | 2009-06-01 | 2014-01-07 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Gaming machine which is executable rescue process in response to insurance bet and gaming method thereof |
US20210375094A1 (en) * | 2020-05-28 | 2021-12-02 | Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. | Systems and techniques for wager-associated parameter control graphical state management |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JPWO2007026399A1 (en) | 2009-03-05 |
WO2007026399A1 (en) | 2007-03-08 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US8105154B2 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US7980944B2 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US20070060282A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US20070060277A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US20070060283A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US20070060280A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US20070060279A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US20070060250A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US20070060281A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US20070060324A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US20070105622A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US8033907B2 (en) | Slot machine and control method of game | |
US20070105621A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US20070135206A1 (en) | Gaming machine and game system | |
US8371926B2 (en) | Slot machine and control method of game | |
US7985131B2 (en) | Slot machine and control method of game | |
US20080064473A1 (en) | Slot machine and control method of game | |
US7972208B2 (en) | Slot machine and control method of game | |
AU2006200954B2 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US8235802B2 (en) | Slot machine with insurance function and control method thereof | |
EP1764756A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
EP1760675A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
EP1785958A1 (en) | Gaming machine, game control method and game system | |
US20080254865A1 (en) | Gaming machine and control method of game |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: ARUZE GAMING AMERICA, INC., NEVADA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:OKADA, KAZUO;FUJIMOTO, JUN;REEL/FRAME:017511/0653 Effective date: 20051226 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |